"if
Ws)t Mmbergttp
OF
prtt&f) Columbia
CALENDAR
THIRTEENTH SESSION
1927- 1928
VANCOUVER. BRITISH COLUMBIA
1927 Wbt WLuibtxtity
OF
JlrttteJ) Columbia
CALENDAR
Thirteenth Session
1927-1928
VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA
1927 CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year 5
Visitor 7
Chancellor 7
President 7
The Board of Governors 7
The Senate 7
Officers and Staff 8
Historical Sketch 15
The Constitution of the University 17
The Work of the University 18
Retiring Allowances 19
Endowments and Donations 20
Suggested Local Scholarships 21
The Library 22
New Buildings 24
General Information 36
Admission to the University 38
Registration and Attendance 40
Fees 42
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 44
Faculty op Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures 60
Time Table of Supplemental Examinations 64
Regulations in Reference to Courses
First and Second Years 66
Third and Fourth Years—Pass 68
Third and Fourth Years—Honours 69
For the M.A. Degree 75
Examinations and Advancement 81
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Bacteriology 83
" Botany 84
" Chemistry 89
" Classics 93
" Economics, Sociology and Political Science .. 97
" Education 101
" English 105
" " Geology and Geography 112
" History 117
" " Mathematics 123
" " Modern Languages 128
" Philosophy 132
" Physics 135
" Zoology 137
Faculty op Applied Science
Foreword 141
Regulations in Reference to Courses 143
General Outline of Courses 145
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering 147
Chemistry 148
Civil Engineering 149
Electrical Engineering 152
Forest Engineering 153 The University op British Columbia
. Geological Engineering 155
Mechanical Engineering 157
Metallurgical Engineering 158, 160
Mining Engineering 158, 161
Nursing and Health 162
Double Course in Arts and Applied Science 170
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc 170
Examinations and Advancement 172
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany 174
" Chemistry 177
" Civil Engineering 180
" " Economics 191
" Forestry 191
" " Geology and Geography 196
" Mathematics 201
" " Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 202
" " Mining and Metallurgy 214
" Physics 218
" Nursing and Health 220
" Zoology 224
Faculty op Agriculture
Time Table of Lectures 226
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
For the B.S.A. Degree 229
The Occupational Course 229
Short Courses 230
Extension Courses 230
Graduate Work 231, 236
Courses in—
Agronomy Major 233
Animal Husbandry Major 234
Dairyinig Major 234
Horticulture Major 235
Poultry Husbandry Major 235
Zoology (Entomology) Major 236
Examinations and Advancement 237
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Agronomy 239
" Animal Husbandry 242
" Dairying 245
" Horticulture 248
" Poultry Husbandry 250
" " Agricultural Economics 253
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1926-27 255
Degrees Conferred, May, 1926 288
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, May, 1926 293
Summer Session 297
Student Organization 298
Affiliated Colleges—
Victoria College 302
Westminster Hall 303
Anglican Theological College 303
Ryerson College 304 Academic Year
ACADEMIC YEAR 1927-1928
1927 1
I Matriculation Supplemental Examinations
Monday, [ begin
August 29th. J
„■ , t Supplemental Examinations in Arts begin.
September 14th. J rF *
Tuesday, 1 Supplemental Examinations in Applied
September 20th. J Science begin.
Friday 1
September 23rd. } LaSt day f °r Registr*tion-
Tuesday, 1
September 27th. } lectures begm.
Monday, 1 . „. _
October 10th I Last day for Payment of First Term fees-
Saturday, I Lagt for ch in Student8» Courses.
October 15th. I
Wednesday, 1 ^^ f ^ genate
October 19th. J
Friday, I Lagt dfty of Lectures for Term#
December 9th. ;
Monday, I. Exainiliations begin.
December 12th. J
Wednesday, \ Meeting of the Senate.
December 21st. |
Thursday, \
December 22nd, J" Examinations end. The University op British Columbia
1928
Monday,
January 9th.
Monday,
January 23rd.
Wednesday,
February 15th.
Thursday,
April 12th.
Monday,
April 16th.
Second Term begins.
I Last day for payment of Second Term fees,
t Meeting of the Senate.
Last day of Lectures.
Thursday,
April 26th.
Wednesday,
May 9th.
Thursday,
May 10th.
Thursday,
May 10th.
Friday,
June 22nd.
Sessional Examinations begin.
Field Work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the Examinations
\ Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
}
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of Convocation.
Junior Matriculation Examinations begin.
(Date of Senior Matriculation Examinations to be arranged.) THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. R. Randolph Bruce, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS.
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS. (ex officio).
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. (ex officio),
Robebt P. McLennan, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1927.
B. C. Nicholas, Esq., Victoria. Term expires 1927.
Joseph N. Ellis, Esq., B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1937.
Evltn F. K. Farbis, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver. Term expires 1939.
Denis. Muhphy, Hon. Mb. Justice, Vancouver. Term expires 1939..
Henbt C Shaw, Esq., B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1929.
Robie L. Reid, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931.
Campbell Sweeny, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931.
Chbistopheb Spencer, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931.
SENATE
(a) The Minister of Education, The Honourable John Duncan MacLean,
M.D., CM., LL.D.
The Chancellor.
The President (Chairman).
(6) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A., M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Bbock, Esq.,
M.A, LL.D., F.G.S, F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, H. T. J. Coleman, Esq.,
B.A, PhJD.
Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture; H. M. Kino, Esq.,
B.S.A., M.S.; A. F. Barss, Esq., A.B., B.S. in Agr., M.S.
Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: H. R. Christie,
Esq., B.SC.F.; R. H. Clark, Esq., M.A., Ph.D.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Daniel
Buchanan, Esq., M.A, Ph.D., F.R.S.C; M. Y. Williams, Esq.,
B.Sc, Ph.D, F.G.S.A. The University op British Columbia
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:—
E. J. Rothwell, Esq., M.B, New Westminster.
His Honour Peter S. Lampman, Victoria.
James Henderson, Esq, M.A, Vancouver.
(d) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esq, B.A, LL.D.
The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson, Esq, B.A.
The Principal of Victoria Normal School, D. L. MacLaubin, Esq, B.A
(e) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, G. A.
Ferousson, Esq, B.A.
(/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:—
Victoria College, Victoria, E. B. Paul, Esq, M.A, LL.D.
Westminster Hall, Vancouver (Theological), Rev. W. H. Smith,
M.A, Ph.D, D.D.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A, D.D.
Rverson College, Vancouver (Theological), Rev. J. G. Brown,
M.A, D.D.
(g) Elected by Convocation:—
G. G. Sedgewick, Esq, B.A, Ph.D, Vancouver.
C Killam, Esq, M.A, D.C.L, Vancouver.
Rev. A. H. Sovebeign, M.A, B.D, F.R.G.S, Vancouver.
His Honoub J. D. Swanson, B.A, Kamloops.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencieb, M.A, D.D, Vancouver.
W B. Burnett, Esq, B.A, M.D, CM, F;A.CS, Vancouver.
G. W. Scott, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
A. E. Lord, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esq., B.A, Vancouver.
J. M. Turnbull, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
J. S. Gordon, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
G. E. Robinson, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
A. E. Richards, Esq, B.S.A, New Westminster.
W. P. Argue, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A, Vancouver.
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A, D.Sc. (Iowa State College),
LL.D. (Western Ontario), President.
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Dean of the
Faculty of Arts and Science.
Reginald W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Dean of
the Faculty of Applied Science.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A (Wisconsin), Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of Women.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar.
F. Dallas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian. Officers and Staff
Department of Agronomy
P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmb, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp. Agriculture, Sweden), Professor and Head of the Department.
G. G. Moe, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor (on leave of
absence 1927-28).
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
Geo. B. Boving, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
R. L. Davis, B.S. (Montana), M.S. (Iowa State College), Assistant
Professor.
H. R. Hare, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
J. G. Jervis, V.S. (Ont. Vet Col.), B.V.Sc (Toronto), Lecturer in
Veterinary Science.
Department of Bacteriology
Hibbebt Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C.
Professor and Head of the Department.
Miss Freda L. Wilson, M.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor.
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Department of Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor
and Head of the Department
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E, Assistant Professor.
Frank Dickson,- B.A. (Queen's), Assistant Professor.
Mtss Mildred H. Campbell, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Miss Jean Davidson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Braham G. Griffith, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
C W. Aroue, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant
Department of Chemistry
E. H. Archibald, B.Sc (Dal.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C,
Professor and Head of the Department
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipsig), Professor of Organic
Chemistry.
W. F. Seyer, B.A, M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Assistant Professor.
J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Assistant Professor
(on leave of absence 1927-28).
John Allardyce, M.A. (Brit CoL), Instructor.
M. Neal Carter, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Lecturer.
R. W. Ball, B.A- (Brit Col.), Assistant.
D. F. Stedman, B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.), Ph.D. (London), Assistant
A. F. Gallaugher, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
R. H. Ball, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant 10 The University of British Columbia
Department of Civil Engineering
William E. Duckering A.B, B.S. in C.E, C.E. (Washington), Professor
and Head of the Department.
E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE, Associate
Professor.
F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
J. R. Grant, B.Sc. (Queen's), M.E.I.C, M.A.S.CE, Special Lecturer.
A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor.
A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor.
Carl F. Barton, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Greek.
H. T. Logan, B.A. (McGill and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor.
Homer A. Thompson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Dairying
Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), N.D.D, British Dairy Institute,
University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of the
Department.
N. S. Golding, N.D.A, N.D.D, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Iowa), Associate
Professor.
J. D. Middlemas, B.Sc. (Agr.), (Edinburgh), Assistant.
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Theodore H. Boggs, B.A. (Acadia and Yale), M.A, Ph.D. (Yale), Professor and Head of the Department.
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L, M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor.
S. E. Beckett, M.A. (Queen's), Assistant Professor.
Norman A. Robertson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer.
George Allen, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss Doris Lee, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's),
Professor and Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman, B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M., Ph.D.
(Stanford), Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education.
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Special Lecturer.
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of
the Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard),
Associate Professor. Officers and Staff 11
Frederick G. C Wood, B.A- (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor.
Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M, PhD. (Harvard), Assistant
Professor.
Mm M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant Professor.
Frank H. Wilcox, A.B, Ph.D. (Calif.), Assistant Professor.
Mas Sallee Murphy, B.A. (Brit. CoL), M.A. (Toronto), Assistant.
Miss Dorothy Wboughton, B.A. (Oxon.), Assistant
Department of Forestry
H. R. Christie, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant Professor.
Department of Geology and Geography
R. W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Professor and
Head of the Department.
S. J. Schofield, M.A, B.Sc (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of
Technology), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural Geology.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A, Professor of
Palaeontology and Stratigraphy.
T. C Phemister, B.Sc. (Glasgow), Sc.M. (Chicago), PhD. (Glasgow),
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography.
E. M. Burwash, B.A. (Toronto), M.A, B.D. (Victoria), PhJD. (Toronto
and Chicago), Lecturer.
W. A. Jones, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
^ Department of History
Mack Eastman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor and Head
of the Department. (On leave of absence).
W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Ph.D. (Toronto),
Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon), Assistant Professor.
Hugh L. Keenleyside, B.A,. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Clark), Lecturer.
Stanley Moodie, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and
Head of the Department.
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon
Agricultural College), Professor.
F. E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
John C Wilcox, B.S.A. (Brit CoL), Assistant 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), PhD. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago).
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor.
B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cambridge), R.N. (retired), Assistant Professor.
Walter H. Gage, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Miss Islay Johnston, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
A. P. Mellish, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham), Professor and Head of the Department.
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor of Mechanical En
gineering. I f
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. Engineering (London),
AJU.I. MechE, Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering.
Leonard B. Stacet, B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.)t Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
G. Sinclair Smith, M.A.Sc. (McGill), Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E, R.N, M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department
H. N. Thomson, B.Sc. (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
H. Ashton, M.A. (Cantab), D. Lett. (Univ. Paris), D. Litt. (Birmingham), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique (France), Professor and Head of the Department (on leave of absence 1927-28).
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor
of French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Calif), Assistant Professor of Modern Languages.
Henri Chodat, M.A. (McGill and Harvard), Assistant Professor of
French. Officers and Staff 13
Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit CoL), Instructor in
French.
E. E. Delavault, B. es L, L. en D. (Paris), Assistant in Oral French.
Madame G. Barry, Assistant in Oral French.
Miss Madge Portsmouth, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant in French.
Miss S. J. Battle, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant in German.
Mdjs Wessie Tipping, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant in French.
Department of Nursing and Health
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
Mabel F. Gray, R.N, Cert.P.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant Professor
of Nursing.
Department of Philosophy
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), PhD. (Columbia), Professor and
Head of the Department.
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Associate Professor.
Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman, B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M, Ph.D.
(Stanford), Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education.
Department of Physics
T. C. Hebb, M.A, B.Sc (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head
of the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, ILL), PhJX (Chicago),
Associate Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (CaL), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrcm, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
D. F. Stedman, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (London), Assistant
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), Professor and Head of the Department.
V. S. Asmundson, B.S.A. (Sask.}, M.S.A. (Cornell), Assistant Professor.
W. J. Riley, B.S.A. (Brit CoL), Assistant.
Department of Zoology
C McLean Fbasee, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department.
G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor (on
leave of absence 1927-28).
Miss Gertrude M. Smith, B.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor.
Miss Mildred H. Campbell, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Harold White, M.D, CM. (McGill), Medical Examiner to Students. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was first
advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not
until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act
establishing a body politic and corporate named '' The University
of British Columbia." In 1891 this Aet was amended to require
that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after
the election of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were
elected, but a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by
the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first
attempt to establish a University in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University
was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted
the affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized
Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was
affiliated with McGill University in order to provide First Year
work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First
Year work in Arts was offered by Victoria High School when
it became Victoria College by affiliation with McGill University
in 1902. In the same year Vancouver College undertook the
Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Aet was passed incorporating the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the
McGill University College of British Columbia. The scope of
the work undertaken by this college was gradually increased
until at the time it was taken over by the University of British
Columbia it was giving three years in Arts and Science, and
two years in Applied Science. When the University of British
Columbia opened in the autumn of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and Victoria College, which since
1907 had been a part of it, ceased to exist. 16 The University of British Columbia
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by
Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he
introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was
followed in 1908 by an Aet establishing and incorporating the
University of British Columbia and repealing the old Act of
1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments, determines
the present constitution of the University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature
in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site
Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University.
The Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in
Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province
recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the
Executive Council decided to place the University at Point
Grey—the site which the Commission had named as its first
choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the
Lieutenant-Governor in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists
of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of
the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the
University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between
it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided by its
sale or lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of
Education, called for competitive plans which should include
plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and
a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus.
Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the
successful competitors, and were appointed University architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 1st, 1912, chose Mr.
F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In
March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as
President of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A, M.D, C.M,
LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected Historical Sketch 17
Chancellor; on April 12th, 1921, he was re-elected for a second
term, and on April 3rd, 1924, for a third term. On the death of
President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of
the Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and
on June 1st, 1919, President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part
of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building
at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was
resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the
contract was let for the Library. These two buildings which
are of stone and are fire-proof, conform closely to the original
plans as prepared by the architects in 1914. The initial units
of these structures, as well as nine other buildings which are
of a less permanent character and are described at a later page
in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning
of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new
quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on
October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees
were granted by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the British
Columbia University Act B.C.R.S. 1924 c. 265, which provides
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, and the Faculties;
that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates
of any university in His Majesty's dominions resident in
the Province two years prior to the date fixed for the
first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-five
members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in
Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of
the Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convocation, and all gradutes of the University; that the 18 The University of British Columbia
Chancellor shall be elected by Convocation; that the
Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor,
President, and nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant Governor in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The Minister of Education, the Chancellor,
and the President of the University, who shall be Chairman thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each
of the Faculties elected by members of the Faculty;
(c) three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one
member elected by the high-school principals and
assistants who are actually engaged in teaching' (/) one
member elected by the Provincial Teachers' Institute
organized under subsection (e) of section 8 of the
"Public Schools Act"; (g) one member to be elected
by the governing body of every affiliated college or
school in this Province; (h) fifteen members to be
elected by Convocation from the members thereof;
It is further provided that the University shall be non-
sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to grant
such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of
Knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine.
It reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to
confer degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts
that "No other university having corporate powers capable of
being exercised within the Province shall be known by the
same name, nor shall any such university have power to grant
degrees."
THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of British Columbia is an integral part of
the public educational system of the Province, and its function
is to complete the work begun in the public and high schools.
It is the policy of the University to promote education in general, Retiring Allowances 19
and in particular to serve its constituency through three
channels—teaching, research, and extension work.
As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in
the various branches of a liberal education and in those technical
departments which are most directly related to the life and
industries of the Province. The scope of the teaching activity
of the University is fully described in Sec. 9 of the Act.
In order to make the teaching of the University more vital
and for the advancement of knowledge, research is encouraged
in every department.
The people of the Province are informed of the results of
special work by the staff of the University through a system
of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various
parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December
and April. In the case of places which can be visited without
prejudice to the duties of the lecturer at the University, lectures
are arranged to take place during the University term. A list
of subjects and lecturers can be obtained on application to the
Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom
all arrangements are made.
RETIRING ALLOWANCES
In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University
of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of retiring
allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are
placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association
of America, a corporation made possible by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities for teachers and
other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational or research work."
In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was
elected as a member of the list of institutions associated with
the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching
and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in ten annual installments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution. 20 The University op British Columbia
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
However well supported by public funds, a University must
depend to a great extent upon private benefactors. In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that:
"Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the
Senate, found one or more professorships, lectureships,
fellowships, scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other
awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other property, and conveying the same
to the University for. such purposes, and every such
endowment of lands or other property shall be vested in
the University for the purpose or purposes for which it
is given."
Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher
education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University
by making contributions that lie within their power. It is
gratifying to note that the number of those who assist in this
way has been constantly growing.
The removal of the University to its permanent home in
Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and
progress, and within the last two years many valuable donations
have been received, especially in the form of equipment for the
various Laboratories.
Among donations received recently special mention should
be made of the very fine Ethnological collection representing
the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia donated to the
University by Mr. Frank Burnett, Sr, and also of the estate
of the late Mr. David Thom, of Hammond, B. C, bequeathed by
him to the Faculty of Agriculture. Mr. Thom left his entire
estate, consisting of a farm of thirty-five acres and cash and
bonds amounting to fifty-five hundred dollars—a total net value
of approximately eleven thousand dollars, to be used for the
assistance and encouragement of students in the Faculty of
Agriculture.
A list of the other most important gifts received during
last year is given below under the various departments. Endowments and Donations . 21
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
The Prestolite Co.—Four Prestolite batteries.
The Ford Co. of Canada—The loan, for an indefinitely long period, of a motor car
engine and chassis.
Department of Animal Husbandry
T. D. Trapp, Esq, New Westminster—A partial set of Herd Books of the Canadian
Ayrshire Breeders' Association.
Dr. J. G. Jervis, Milner, B. C.—Livestock wood-cuts and veterinary specimens.
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa—Case of mounted wool and cloth samples.
Mr. J. F. Vanderhoop, Pemberton Meadows—a complete set of Canadian Ayrshire
Herd Register.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
Miss Blanche McAvoy, Chicago—Representative collection of the flora of the Bella
Coola district, B.C.
Mr. Thos. M. C. Taylor—Collection of specimens from Summerland district, B. C.
Mr. E. Walmsley, New Westminster—Seeds of trees and shrubs from Japan.
Mr. F. N. Fenton, Kerrisdale—Seeds of Australian native flowers.
Calcutta Botanical Gardens—Seeds of Himalayan plants.
Dr. J. Griffiths, Vancouver, B. C.—Seeds of Glaucium flavum for medicinal plant
investigations.
Mr. A. R. Snowball, Vancouver, B. C.—Plants of Yucca for gardens.
Professor R. B. Thomson, University of Toronto—Specimens of Cordyceps ("Vegetable caterpillar") from New Zealand. w
The above are in addition to numerous small collections
sent in to be identified, the specimens being retained for the
herbarium.
Department of Forestry
Dominion Forestry Branch—Samples of tree seed; also various publications.
United States Forest Service—Forestry publications.
B. C. Forest Branch—Forestry publications.
Gordon and James Abernethy—Samples of Hawaiian woods.
J. Fyfe Smith & Co. Ltd.—Exhibits of hardwoods, North American and foreign.
McLennan, McFeeley & Co. Ltd.—Exhibit of wire rope used in logging.
M. Mazur—Samples of Russian woods.
Department of Nursing and Health
Nursing Class of 1985—Valedictory gift of twenty dollars, to be expended for
reference books for the Nursing section of the Library.
Department of Philosophy
Mrs. James E. Creighton, Victoria—"Studies in Speculative Philosophy," by the late
Professor James Edwin Creighton, Ph.D., LL.D., of Cornell University.
SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS
As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at
present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a
scheme which has great possibilities both for the growth of the
University and the prosperity of the Province is earnestly
recommended to consideration. 22 The University op British Columbia
In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the
United States, local or district scholarships have proved a strong
bond between the community and the University, have brought
the University close to the life of the young, and opened up
the prospect of a University education to many who would not
otherwise have contemplated it.
Such local or district scholarships might be established as
Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or
other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They would be
awarded by a local authority, but the University would reserve
the right of confirmation.
In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is
desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may
be offered for students taking a particular course, and in this
way the study of such sciences and technical branches of knowledge as have special importance for the industries of the
district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be
arranged to meet local needs and to prepare the native sons
of the Province to play their part in the development of its
resources.
THE LIBRARY
The University Library consists of 61,000 volumes and
about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in
all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 500 magazines and
periodical publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system.
Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven
days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially re- The Library 23
ferred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These
are shelved apart from the main collection, and are loaned
only for use in the building, and for a limited period of two
hours. They may, however, be taken from the Library for
over-night loan, or for any period in which the Library is
closed. In these cases they are returnable before 9 a.m.
Unbound periodicals are not issued on loan. Books that
are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation, are loaned
only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the use of the staff
and students of the University, its resources are available to
those of the general public engaged in research or special study,
and who make personal application to the Librarian for the
privilege of its use.
During the session the Library is open on week days from
8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hour
of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m.,
except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made
gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been
both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed
acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number
of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of scientific
periodicals, given by societies and friends of the University. NEW BUILDINGS
LOCATION
The new home of the University is situated on the promontory which forms the western extremity of the Point Grey
Peninsula. On three sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia.
The site comprises an area of 548 acres, of which approximatley
one-half is campus. In all directions appear snow-capped
mountains, strikingly rugged and impressive.
BUILDINGS
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen
hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semipermanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the
Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The
permanent buildings have been erected in the location originally
assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated aa
"unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned"
area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended
for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of present
requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution.
This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the
present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the
whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present
advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation
with a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A
separate system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets.
The various services throughout these buildings, such as hot and
cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory
purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are
all of a modern type. An attempt has been made to reduce New Buildings 25
vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving
apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork.
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings
which have been erected and indicates the nature of their
construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups
of buildings which are to be erected in the future.
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three
are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the Library,
and the Power House.
Science Building
The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor style,
this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly
readily to those adaptations which are necessary in order to meet
modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia
granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall
surfaces, consisting of the split faces of granite arranged
in random sizes with white joints, have been used. The
general grey tone is relieved by the use of a small quantity of
field stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with
leaded glass in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished
in brick work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping
with that of the period it is designed to represent.
This building, which was designed for the sole use of
Chemistry ultimately, now accommodates the Departments of
Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One
and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent
assignment of space has been alloted to Physics, and half of one
floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing and
Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well lighted,
and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout
the entire building. Distilled water, gas, steam, compressed air,
and electrical supply circuits have been provided wherever re- 26 The University of British Columbia
quired. These services are carried in trenches in the floor, an
arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs.
Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance
rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms,
photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room for
students.
Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one large
and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for general
chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty students,
laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and
quantitative analysis, an elementary organic laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry,
another for industrial chemistry, and a commodious laboratory
for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work
in photo-chemistry is found on the third floor. There are
also several small laboratories well equipped for research work.
Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large lecture
rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant temperature room and a battery room. Three of the
large laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary
Physics, Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. The fourth is
specially designed for the conducting of experiments requiring
the use of highly sensitive apparatus. Smaller laboratories are
designed for light and X-ray experiments.
Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department
for four laboratories. Two of these are for general student use,
one is for serological work and one is for advanced research.
In addition to laboratory and lecture room accommodation, an
office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been
provided.
Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this
Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided in
modern training schools for the instruction of nurses. All the
equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary New BurLDiNGs 27
nursing procedure is available, and can be used for practice
teaching purposes.
Library Building
The central unit of the Library Building is a massive
structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes with
the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines. Owing
to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing is more broken,
and thus better effects of light and shade are obtained. Some
tracery and stained glass in the upper portion of the building is
employed to obtain in a restricted manner the richness of detail
characteristic of this style of architecture.
Internally, the same effect has been striven for, wherever
such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The
Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and wall
surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried
up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the
lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen
Stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and corbels to roof
trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the
Concourse and of the two reading rooms adjacent are finished
in native Woods stained a dark brown, with patterae and shields
picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the
building are of leaded glass. In the Concourse and the inner
hall this is of a pale amber shade, with the coats of arms of the
Canadian Universities worked into the centre light. On the
window above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse
the armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest
universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those
of the University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main
Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished with
large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the general
colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal parts of the
building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to represent old
fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and other wood finish.
The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft. by 50
ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms, each 60 ft. by 28 The University of British Columbia
30 feet, open off the main reading room. These rooms provide
accommodation for 250 students. The sixth and seventh tiers
of the stack, not being required at present to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will
accommodate about fifty readers. The Stack, which occupies
the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of
which are fully equipped with steel stacks of the latest design.
Here fifty-two semi-private study "carrels" facilitate research
for advanced students. The offices of the Librarian and the
Library Staff provide ample accommodation for receiving,
cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the
"Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also
located in this building. The Burnett collection represents the
arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which
has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the University, is the result
of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and South
Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections of this
class of material yet accumulated by any private collector.
Power House
The Power House has been placed in the centre of the space
which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle, and will
therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does not pretend to
follow very closely the style of the other permanent buildings
except in mass, being finished in rough case of broken texture,
relieved with red quarry tiles as diapers, copings and offsets,
with windows grouped as far as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids.
The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500 horse
power at normal rating. The present installation consists of
three units, each of 250 horse power normal rating, capable of
developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each unit, so equipped
as to operate independently of the others, may act as a service
as well as an experimental station. In other words, on any one
boiler an experimental test may be conducted while the rest New Buildings 29
of the plant is cut in on the service lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation so that close checking and
comparisons of the performance of the different types of boilers
may be made to a degree.
The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural Draft
Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe Travelling
Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate is
also equipped with air pre-heater, by-passed, so that tests may
be conducted with or without pre-heated air. Induced draft is
used with individual forced draft fans; separate boiler feed
lines and pump with Linehart Scale provide boiler feed for
tests. A travelling weigh scale records the amount of coal used,
while a steam jet ash conveyor elevates the ashes to an overhead
bunker.
The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to
economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the use of
different appliances will be of interest and value to power plant
users.
SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS
In this group there are nine buildings in all,—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science, Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical, Electrical;
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; and the Forest Products
Laboratory Building. These buildings, which are set on concrete
foundations, are of frame construction with stucco finish, and
are designed for a life of forty years. Their exterior design
harmonizes with the permanent buildings so far as materials
of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of the
Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished
internally with plaster and fir trim.
Administration Building
On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices
of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science,
the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor are two
large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and 30 The University of British Columbia
the Senate, and the other for meetings of Faculties and
Committees.
Auditorium Building
The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the most
modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029, a large
and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage
dressing rooms. Provision has been made for the operating of
moving pictures and the stage is equipped with a cyclorama and
all necessary electrical illumination devices.
The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed
to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is also a small
dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the
latest cooking and baking equipment.
The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest
room, students' council offices, and numerous committee rooms
for subsidiary organizations are also located in this building.
Arts Building
In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the semipermanent group, are located the lecture rooms and offices for
the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts and Science:
Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern Languages and
Philosophy.
The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and
exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates 250
students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from 32 to 64.
Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and Science
are located in this building, as is also the office of the Dean
of Women.
Applied Science Building
This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany,
Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil New Buildings 31
Engineering. All the laboratories have been equipped with the
essential services. One large lecture room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11 smaller lecture rooms with a
seating capacity ranging from 25 to 112, are located in this
building. These will be used by the different Departments
jointly as class requirements may determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting rooms and for the necessary
offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic
rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common
room for students have also been provided.
Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms, the
Department of Geology has three large and well equipped
laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for
graduate students and one for the staff.
The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections of
illustrative material which supplements the extensive working
collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped
with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference.
Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large junior
laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research laboratories
and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used
for practical work in Botany and General Biology. A Herbarium
of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over
1000 specimens of native plants furnish an abundance of material
for class room and laboratory purposes.
Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in
Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped. There is
also a room for class material, which will serve for a time as a
repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used
for illustration.
Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its own
laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class room 32 The University of British Columbia
and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite
extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil Engineering and
Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt
which has been preserved on the campus as a natural park, a
very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students.
Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted
draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes in
drawing, mapping, machine design and computation work. The
equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is
available. The hydraulic laboratory, which is situated in the
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equippe<J
for demonstrations and tests covering the main field of hydraulic
principles and machinery; while in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering,
excellent facilities are available for extensive tests of timber,
cement and steel.
Agriculture Building
This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy,
Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the Farm Survey
studies are also located in this building.
The lecture rooms, of which there are four, are exceptionally
well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the
seating capacity of the others ranges from 36 to 54.
In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation, provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms,
storage rooms and also for a photographic dark room, a herd
book room, and a students' common room.
Agronomy.—This Department is provided with a combined
laboratory and lecture room which is equipped with water, gas
and electricity. While this room will be used for studies in
crop production, for the judging of specimens of plants and for
the determination of soil samples, the main emphasis will be laid
on the work conducted in the Department's outdoor laboratory—
the Agronomy fields. New Buildings 33
Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of
livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the
Department possesses a wealth of data for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and
nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding.
Dairying.—The new laboratories of the Department of
Dairying provide facilities for conducting researches on the bacterial flora of milk, butter and cheese, and the relation of the flora
to the production and sale of high quality products. Excellent
provision is made for the instruction of students in the work
indicated. Cheese-making and butter-making will be conducted
in the temporary dairy building; but the new laboratories permit
of closer contact of the various activities of the Department.
Horticulture.—In the laboratory provided for this Department, comprehensive studies supplement the practical experience
of the students in the propagation, planting, pruning and care of
horticultural crops. Materials for these purposes are provided
from the orchard, the ornamental trees, shrubs and flowers, and
from plants grown in the glass propagating house.
Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratory in the
Agriculture Building, facilities and equipment are provided to
assist in the study of poultry nutrition, disease, and other problems related to the industry. On the poultry plant, which is the
main laboratory of the Poultry Department, ten pure breeds of
commercial importance are tested and bred for egg and meat
production. Experiments in management and marketing are
conducted with these birds and their products.
Mechanical and Electrical Buildings
The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
is housed in two buildings, the larger one for Mechanical
Engineering, the smaller for Electrical Engineering. The Mechanical Building comprises a large laboratory, three lecture
rooms, a draughting room, a calorimeter room, a storage room,
and a machine shop. In the Electrical Building, there are two 34 The University of British Columbia
electrical laboratories, a junior and a senior, a battery room, a
photometer room and a meter standardizing room, together with
the necessary office accommodation.
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building
The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total
area of 5000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory, which
includes a workshop, storage room and flotation room, is well
equipped with a variety of small scale machines, including
crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables. The laboratory
is fully wired for power and light, and has large water mains
and drains, and a two-ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical
laboratory includes a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and
gas furnaces; a wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood,
and work benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two
balance rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage
space.
The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests and
demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic machines
and pumps. A 60-horse-power D.C. motor is utilized to drive
either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal pump having a capacity
of 2400 gallons per minute against a 70-foot head, or to drive
a 4-inch two stage pump having a capacity of 525 gallons per
minute against a 325-foot head. The water from the large
pump can be used to drive a 10-ineh vertical reaction turbine,
while the flow from the high pressure pump can be used to
drive an 18-inch Pelton Wheel, thus providing students with
actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of
machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle,
and orifice measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of Venturi, current and service meters. One section
of the laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of
cement and sand.
Forest Products Laboratory Buildings
The three buildings included in this group were erected
by the University for the use of the Vancouver Forst Products New Buildings 35
Laboratory of the Dominion Forest Service. They consist of
a main building for offices and laboratories, an air-seasoning
building, and an experimental dry-kiln building.
Under a joint agreement between the University and the
Department of the Interior, the University^ besides providing
the buildings, furnishes; heat, light, and power, without cost to
the Dominion Government. The Dominion Forest Service has
undertaken to supply the personnel and to furnish all equipment.
Facilities already established include a large timber
testing laboratory, a special building for lumber seasoning, an
experimental dry-kiln building equipped with oil-fired steam
plant and automatic temperature and humidity controller, a
combined photographic and pathological laboratory, a carpenter
shop, and suitable offices. Accommodation is also provided for
an entomologist of the Federal Department of Agriculture. The
testing laboratory is equipped with machines ranging from a
200,000-pound Olsen Universal to the most delicate balances. 36 The University of British Columbia
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The University Year or Session is divided into two terms.
The first begins on Tuesday, September 27th, 1927, and the
second on Monday, January 9th, 1928. Registration and enrolment must be completed by Friday, September 23rd, 1927.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1927-28 the University offers instruction
in the four years of each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science,
Applied Science (including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading
to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Applied Science
and Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. It is also possible to
proceed to a Master's degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses
of instruction and facilities for research are offered to students
who are graduates of any University or College of recognized
standing. Admission to these advanced courses, or to the
privileges of research, does not in itself imply admission to
candidacy for a higher degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves
and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the
same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge
pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood is the same, lined with the
distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science,
the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture,
maize.
Physical Examination
In order to promote the physical welfare of the student
body, every student, on entering the University, will be
required to undergo a physical examination, to be conducted General Information 37
by, or under the direction of, the University Medical Examiner.
Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment, may
thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply to his
physician for such remedial measures as his case may require.
About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are re-examined in their
second year.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by
parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions,
vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the
social and intellectual life of the women students.
Board and Residence
A list of approved boarding-houses which receive men or
women students, but not both, may be obtained from the
Registrar after September 1st. Men and women students are
not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are
members of the same family, or receive special perimission from
the Senate. The cost of good board and lodging is from $35 per
month upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill
is operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch,
afternoon tea and light supper may be obtained there at very
reasonable prices. Refreshments at social functions are also
supplied. 38 The University of British Columbia
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University should
be addressed to the Registrar.
1. Except under special circumstances no student under
the age of sixteen is admitted to the First Year Courses in the
Faculty of Arts and Science, and no student under the age of
seventeen to the Second Year Courses in the Faculty of Arts
and Science nor to the First Year Courses in the Faculties of
Agriculture and Applied Science, including Nursing.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses' in the First
Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of
Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are
required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the
Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing
that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere.
Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in
Applied Science, and are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied Science Section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation
Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year
in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial
Senior Matriculation standing will be granted credit in First
Year Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent
or over, or in each paper in which they have made 50 per cent
or over in so far as these papers correspond with those of
First Year Arts.
4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has
passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will
be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination
has covered the same subjects and required the same standard.
If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the
necessary subjects the candidate will be required to pass the
Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered.
5. Prospective candidates who wish to enter by certificates
other than Matriculation certificates issued in British Columbia Admission to the University 39
should under no circumstances come to the University without
having first obtained from the Registrar a statement of the
value of the certificates they hold, as many of these may lack
one or more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject
may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained may not
be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a
certificate may admit to one Faculty and not to another. When
an applicant's diploma or certificate does not show the marks
obtained in the several subjects of the examination he must
arrange to have a statement of his marks sent to the Registrar
by the Education Department or University issuing such diploma
or certificate. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00.
6. A student of another University applying for exemption
from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is
required to submit with his application a Calendar of the
University in which he has previously studied, together with a
complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate
of the standing gained in the several subjects. The Faculty
concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this
University. The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00.
7. No candidate under 18 years of age will be admitted to
the University without complete Junior Matriculation; and no
candidate over 18 years of age who has deficient Matriculation
standing will be admitted without the special permission of the
Faculty concerned.
8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of
the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High
School and University Matriculation Board of the Province.
This Board consists of members appointed by the Department
of Education and by the University. The requirements for
Matriculation may be obtained in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University, or in the
"Courses of Study," issued by the Department of Education. 40 The University of British Columbia
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University
for the session 1927-28 are required to make application to the
Registrar before Friday, September 23rd, on forms to be obtained
at the Registrar's office.
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses
of study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree,
whether they are proceeding to a Master's degree or
not.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree
in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations
precedent to the year in which they are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to a
degree but who have incomplete entrance qualifications
or who are required to pass supplemental examinations
in a year previous to that in which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the
three preceding classes. (See 7, below.)
2. All students other than graduate students are required
to attend in person at the office of the Registrar on or before
Friday, September 23rd, to furnish the information necessary
for the University records; to register for the particular classes
which they wish to attend, and to sign the following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Columbia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered,
and to any amendments thereto which may be made while I
am a student of the University, and I promise to observe the
same."
In the information furnished for the University records,
students are requested to state what churches they propose to
make their place of worship. This information is available for
any of the city churches desiring it.
3. After the above date a fee of $2.00 will be charged for
late registration.
4. Students registering for the first time must present the Registration and Attendance 41
certificates which constitute their qualification for admission
to the course of study for which they wish to register. The
Registrar is empowered to register all duly qualified students.
Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned.
5. Each student on registering will receive a class card for
each class for which he has registered. Only students provided
with such cards will be admitted to a class. Provisional cards
will be given to any students whose status is subject to consideration.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for
which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the
proper form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of
the session. If the application is approved by the Faculty
concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students are not normally required to pass an
examination for admission, but before registering they must
produce a certificate showing that they have satisfied the Dean
and the Heads of the Departments concerned that they are
qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which
they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths
of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory
and credit for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for
lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence
consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only
by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates
or other evidence must be presented immediately on return to
University work. A medical certificate m,*ust show the nature
and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be
obtained from the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance
students may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of
the Department concerned) be excluded from the final examination in a course; but unless the unexcused absences exceed
one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such
students may sit for supplemental examination. 42 The University of British Columbia
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The
University of British Columbia."
1. The sessional fees are as follows:
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
In Arts and Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00
$100.00
In Teacher Training Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $30.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 30.00
w $ 60.00
In Applied Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $75.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 75.00
$150.00
In Nursing and Public Health—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00
$100.00
NOTE.—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional
fee is $1.00, payable, with the Alma Mater fee of $7.00, on or before October loth.
Students admitted to Nursing B or C and poceeding to the Certificate on
a basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee
for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to
correspond with the proportion of work taken in that year.
In Agriculture—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00
$100.00
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 10th $ 7.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 5.00
For Partial Students
Fees per "Unit"—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 10.00
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 7.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 5.00 Fees 43
For Graduates
Registration and Class Fees — Payable on or before
Oct. 15th $ 25.00
After these dates an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted
of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students
for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized
by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will
be made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials
in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student
falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required.
2. Immediately after October 10th and January 23rd, the
Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees that
steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from classes while
the fees remain unpaid.
3. Students registering after October 10th shall pay their
fees at the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the provisions of Regulation 2.
4. Special fees are:—
Regular supplemental examination, per
I paper $ 5.08
Special examination, per paper 7.50
Graduation 20,00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks
before the examination, special examination fees when application for examination is made, and graduation fees two weeks
before Congregation. 44 The University of British Columbia
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES AND
LOANS FOR 1927-28
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-
General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at
the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of Arts and
Science. Honour and pass students may compete for this medal.
The Historical Society Gold Medal
A gold medal, donated by E. W. Keenleyside, Esq., and
known as the Historical Society Gold Medal, will be open to the
members of the graduating class. The award will be made by
the Department of History, on the basis of the student's standing in the courses in History which he has taken during his
undergraduate course, and the general interest he has shown in
the subject.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES
University Scholarships
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate
student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies.
Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the
last day of the final examinations.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of the University, will be open to graduates of this University who intend in the following year to pursue post-graduate
study in this or any other approved university. Application
should be jmjade to the Registrar not later than the last day of
the final examinations.
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $250, donated by the Universities
Service Club, will be awarded for the academic year 1927-28
to a returned soldier student in attendance at The University of
British Columbia. Applications may be made by returned soldier Medals, Scholarships anb Phizes 45
students who intend doing Second, Third, or Fourth Year work
at The University of British Columbia, or post-graduate work at
any approved institution. Each application must contain a
statement of the academic record, the war record, and the special
claims of the applicant, with two supporting references, and
must be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the
final examinations.
The award will be made by Senate, upon recommendation
of Faculty acting in consultation with the Executive of the
Universities Service Club.
The Canadian Federation of University Women Scholarship
The scholarship of the Canadian Federation of University
Women, of the value of $1,200, available for study or research,
is open to any woman holding a degree from a Canadian university. In general, preference will be given to those candidates
who have completed at least one year of graduate study and
have some definite research in preparation. Any candidate
must be recommended by her own university; if successful in
her application, she may pursue her studies at any university
satisfactory to the Committee of Selection. Applications must
be received by the convener of the Scholarship Committee 0f
the Federation not later than February 1st.
The Nichol Scholarship
By the generosity of the Hon. Walter Nichol—Lieutenant-
Governor of the Province, 1921 to 1926,—five three-year
scholarships, each of the annual value of $1,200, have been made
available for study in the University of France, or at one of the
other institutions of higher education in France. With each
scholarship will be given a gold medal, the permanent possession
of the successful candidate. These scholarships will be open to
graduates of the University of British Columbia who intend to
take up teaching as a profession. The third scholarship will
be awarded in 1927.
The intention of the donor being the development in
Canada, and particularly in this Province, of a wider knowledge
of the people of France, their ideals, literature, art and science, 46 The University of British Columbia
and the promotion thereby of a better mutual understanding
between French and British in this country, each successful
candidate must undertake to return to British Columbia to
practise his profession for such time as seems reasonable in the
opinion of the Senate of the University.
Each scholarship may be held for three years, provided the
holder can show from year to year satisfactory progress in the
course of study undertaken. Application must be made to the
Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations.
The Brock Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock, may
be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows
special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Applications should
be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the
final examinations.
The W. C. Macdonald Scholarship
A scholarship of $500, for one year's post-graduate study
at Macdonald College, P.Q., has been put at the disposal of the
University by W. C. Macdonald (Registered). The scholarship
is primarily intended for graduates in Agriculture of The
University of British Columbia, but, failing such, will be open
to any resident of the Province who is a graduate of an agricultural college. Application should be made to the Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
The 1851 Exhibition Scholarship
Under the revised conditions for the award of the 1851
Exhibition Scholarship in Science, The University of British
Columbia is included in the list of universities from which
nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may be made.
These scholarships of £250 per annum, are tenable, ordinarily,
for two years. They are granted only to British subjects under
26 years of age, who have been bona fide students of pure or
applied science of not less than three years' standing. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 47
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship
An annual scholarship at one of the colleges of Oxford it
assigned by the trustees of the late Mr. C.ecil J. Rhodes to the
Province of British Columbia. Each scholarship is tenable for
three years, and is of the value of £400 a year. In accordance
with the wish of Mr. Rhodes, the election of candidates will
depend upon: (1) Force of character, devotion to duty, courage,
sympathy, capacity for leadership; (2) Ability and scholastic
attainments; (3) Physical vigor, as shown by participation in
games or in other ways. A candidate must be a British subject,
with at least five years' domicile in Canada, and unmarried.
He must have passed his nineteenth but not his twenty-fifth
birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is elected. He
must be at least in his Sophomore Year in some recognized
degree-granting university or college of Canada, and (if elected)
complete the work of that year before coming into residence at
Oxford. He may compete either in the province in which he has
acquired any considerable part of his educational qualification,
or in the province in which he has his ordinary private domicile,
home, or residence.
Candidates for the 1928 scholarship must have their applications, with all the required material, in the hands of the
Secretary of the Selection Committee not later than October
20th, 1927. The committee is at present constituted as follows:
Chief Jusice Hunter (Chairman), Mr. Justice Gregory (Deputy-
Chairman), Messrs. H. T. Logan (Secretary), E. A. Munro,
D. N. Hossie, T. Larsen.
The following have been awarded the Rhodes scholarships
from the Province:
A.W.Donaldson 1904 J. B. Clearihue ...: 1911
•I. I. Rubinowitz 1905 *A. N. King 1912
H. R, Bray 1906 G. L. Haggen 1913
T. Larsen 1907 *B. E. Atkins 1914
H. T. Logan 1908 E. V. Gordon 1915
A. Yates 1909 *E. W. Berry 1916
S. C. Dyke 1910 S. Lett 1919 48 The University of British Columbia
J. H. Mennie 1919 N. A. Robertson 1923
L. A. Mills 1920 G. S. Livingston 1924
W. H. Coates 1920 E*. J. Knapton 1925
R. L. Vollum.. 1921 H. V. Warren 1926
L. W. McLennan 1922 A. E. Grauer 1927
* Deceased.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association
Memorial Fund Scholarships
The suim: of $12,000, given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada, provides a fund
which has so far been used to assist returned soldiers in actual
need of money to complete their courses. Out of the income
from this fund, ten scholarships of $75 each are now to be
offered each year for a period of five years, beginning with the
spring of 1927. They are to be awarded, on the results of
examinations in the First, Second, and Third Years in all
faculties, to such returned soldiers or dependents of soldiers as
have the requisite academic standing; failing such, to the student
body at large. All returned soldiers and all children of soldiers
of the Great War who have any expectation of attaining scholarship standing in these years should apply to the Registrar on a
special form not later than the last day of the final examinations.
The Captain Leroy Memorial Scholarship
(See Page 44)
University Scholarship
Two scholarships of $75 each may be awarded to returned
soldiers taking the work of the First Year, the award to be
based on the work of the year.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $75 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $75 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Second Year. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 49
The Shaw Memorial Scholarship*
This scholarship of $137.50, founded by friends of the late
James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will be paid
throughout his undergraduate course to any child of the late
Principal Shaw who is in regular attendance at the University
as a fully matriculated student; when there is no such candidate,
it will be awarded upon the results of the examination of the
Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student
standing highest in any two of the following three subjects,
English, Latin, Greek, and proceeding to the work of the Third
Year.
The McGill Graduates' Scholarship*
A scholarship of $137.50, founded by the McGill Graduates'
Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and French of
the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the
work of the Third Year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110, founded by the members of the
Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the
Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be awarded
to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and
Economics of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the wo*rk of the Third Year.
The Scott Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110—the proceeds of an endowment
of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the Daughters of
the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain
Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his
life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed
♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. 50 The University of British Columbia
his Second Year in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding
in the Third Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a
course including Biology.
Royal Institution Scholarships
Three scholarships of $75 each will be awarded for general
proficiency in the work of the First Year of Arts and Science.
The P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of the
P. E. 0. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student
standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty
of Arts and Science.
The Native Sons of Canada Scholarship
This scholarship, of the annual value of $500, given by the
Native Sons of Canada, Assembly No. 2, through the generosity
of one of its members, and intended to encourage knowledge of
Canada and devotion to her interests, will be awarded wholly
or in part to the undergraduate student of the Second, Third,
or Fourth Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science who submits
the best thesis on an assigned subject of Canadian History.
Unless the leading thesis is of exceptional merit, the scholarship
will be awarded in amounts of $350 and $150 to the first and
second competitors respectively. Subjects for the competition
have been selected as follows:—
1927-28. (1) The United States and Canada, 1849-1927; or
(2) Canada and the Imperial Conferences, 1887-1926.
1928-29. (1) Geographic Factors in Canadian History; or
(2) The Growth of Canadian Political Parties Since
1929-30. (1) Economic Factors in Canadian History; or
(2) The Growth of National Feeling, 1867-1927.
Federation. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $110 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian
History.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student who attains the highest standing in the first four
years' training, academic and practical, of the Nursing and
Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarship*
A scholarship of $165, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing
highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the Third Year
in Applied Science and proceeding to the work of the Fourth
Year. ^^
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $75 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Third Year in Applied Science, the award to be
based on the work of the Second Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $75 will be awarded for general proficiency
in the work of the First Year in Applied Science.
4. IN AGRICULTURE
The British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, donated by the British Columbia
Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to a student taking
the horticultural options of the Third Year. To qualify for this
scholarship candidates must attain scholarship standing, not
'Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. 52 The University op British Columbia
only in horticultural subjects, but also in the work of the year,
and must be proceeding to the Horticultural Course of the
Fourth Year — the year in which the scholarship shall be
enjoyed.
University Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $75 will be awarded to a
student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based
on the work of the First Year.
MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS
University Scholarship
One scholarship of $75 will be awarded upon the results of
the Senior Matriculation Examination.
Royal Institution Scholarships
Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on
the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150
to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b)
$100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the
following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island
(exclusive of Victoria District) and Northern Mainland, (3)
Vancouver District, (4) Fraser Delta (exclusive of Vancouver
District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at the University of British Columbia. Under certain
conditions they may be reserved for limited periods. A winner
who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high school of the
same district mjay have the scholarship reserved for one year,
subject to obtaining satisfactory standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a winner who completes the first two
years of the Arts course in an affiliated institution may have-
the scholarship reserved for two years. Sums accruing from
unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or
loans. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53
PRIZES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the
University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary
subject, to be announced at the beginning of the Session by the
Department of English.
The Players' Club Prize
A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered for
an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance.
The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty
members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize
A book prize of the value of $50, given by Mr. and Mrs.
J. Newton Harvey in memory of their son, Gerald Myles Harvey,
who died on active service, will be awarded to the student in
Arts, and Science who submits the best essay on a subject in
Economics or Political Science which concerns British Columbia
or Canada as a whole. A list of suggested subjects for 1927-28
may be obtained from the Department of Economics, but competitors may write on any subject approved by the Department
and by the donors of the prize, and essays written in the course
of University work, if so approved, may be submitted for the
prize. Intending competitors must notify the Department of
Economics before the 31st of December, 1927, of their intention
to compete.
The Historical Society Prize
Through the generosity of R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C, the
Historical Society of the University has been able to offer,
annually, a prize of $25, open to all students in Arts and Science,
for the best essay on an assigned subject. 54 The University op British Columbia
The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize
This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's Conservative Association, is open to students taking the Mathematics
of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. In
awarding it preference will be given to the son or daughter of
a deceased soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in
the subject.
The Letters Club Prize
A prize of $25, presented by R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C, honorary member of the Letters Club, is offered annually for the
best essay by an undergraduate student in Arts on an assigned
subject in Canadian literature. The award will be made on the
recommendation of the Department of English. The subjects
for the Seccion 1927-28 are as follows:
(1) "Sam Slick."
(2) W. H. Drummond.
(3) The Canadian Northwest in Literature.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University
of British Columbia, will be awarded annually to the student
obtaining first place in the Fourth Year of Applied Science.
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver
Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of
the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fourth Year student in the Faculty
of Applied Science.
The Professional Engineers' Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by
the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55
for competition by those students in the Third Year of the
Faculty of Applied Science who are registered as pupils with
the Association. The prizes are awarded for the best summer
essays in five branches of engineering.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British
Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in
the Course in Public Health Nursing.
BURSARIES
The Canadian Club of Vancouver Bursary
Through the generosity of the Canadian Club of Vancouver,
a sum: of $300 will be available in 1927-28 to assist worthy male
matriculants who would not otherwise be able to enter upon the
University course. Candidates must be British subjects. They
should make application for the award as soon as possible after
the announcement of matriculation results, and not later than
September 1st.
Graduate Bursary in Mining and Metallurgy
Through the British Columbia Division of the Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, the Granby Consolidated
Mining and Smelting Company, and the Crow's Nest Coal Company, each offer to give employment annually to two selected
graduates of The University of British Columbia, to enable them,
while earning a livelihood, to obtain practical experience and
personal knowledge of the various phases of metal mining or
smelting, and coal mining, respectively, under favorable conditions and in the minimum of time.
The American Women's Club Bursary
(Through the generosity of the American Women's Club of
Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1927-28 to assist
a student who has satisfactorily completed the First Year in
Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the
course in the Second Year. Application should be made to
the Registrar not later than September 1st. 56 The University op British Columbia
LOANS
Loans to deserving undergraduates may be made by the
President from the following funds:
Royal Institution
Unpaid Royal Institution scholarships of the current year,
if any. Maximum individual loan, $100.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy
British Columbia Division
This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the
Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to
students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must
be recommended by the departments of Geology, Mining and
Metallurgy.
Arts '28
Through the generosity of the Class of Arts '28, the sum
of $100 has been donated to the loan funds of the University,
and will be available to final year students in Art and Science
in the academic year 1927-28.
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at the
close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations,
after the June examination.
2. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based
on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who
obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
3. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than one
scholarship each, although they may win more and will be given
credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won
but not held will pass to candidates next in order of merit,
provided they have made the required marks.
4. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are
paid in three instalments—on the 15th of November, the 15th Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57
of January and the 15th of March. Normally this is during the
session following their award, and undergraduate winners must
continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be reserved a
year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance.
5. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign
the monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the
University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds
thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or
student loans.
6. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open
to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and
marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken into
account in awarding them. THE _V}
FACULTY
vLof
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture;
MORNINGS
10
11
MONDAT
Biology 2
Biology 3
Botany 6e
Economics 3
English 1 a
Sees. 7, 8, 9,
II
English 13
French 2
Sees, a, b, c .
10,
French 4 c
Geology 3 and 4..
Greek 1 _.-.
Mathematics 10..
Philosophy I a
Physics 1 a
Botany 5 a
Botany 6 d
Chemistry 8
Economics 1 a.
English 9
English 10
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geology 1
History 8
Mathematics 1 ....
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Philosophy 1 C
Philosophy 8
Physics 1 b
Physics 8
Agricultural
Economics
Biology 1
Chemistry 7
Economics I b
English 14
French 1
Sees, a, b, c, d..
French 3 c
French 4d „..
Geology 8
German, Beg. A..
Government 8
History 2.
History 7
Latin 1 a
Mathematics 2
Physics 4
Zoology 1
Room
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
A 108
A 103,
106,205,
206,207
A 100
A 101,
104,105
A 202
Apl02
A 102
A 201
AplOO
S200
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 108
S300
A 201
A 104
A 105
AplOO
A 101
A 100,
108,205,
206,207
A 106
A 102
S200
S210
Ag 104
AplOO
S417
S400
A 203
A 105,
108,204
207
A 208
A 104
Apl02
A 201
A 205
A 100
A 101
A 103
A 106
S210
AplOl
Tuesday
Botany 2
Botany 4
Economics 2
English lb
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4.
5, 6
French 2
Sees, d, e, t
Geology 5 and 12.,
Latin 2
Latin 6
Mathematics 3
Physics 2 a
Zoology 2
Zoology 8
Botany 8 J
Botany 6 c "
Chemistry 9
Economics 1 c
Economics 4
English 17
French 4 a
Geology 2
German 1
Government 1
Greek 2
History 6
Mathematics 1
Sees. 6, 7 ,8, 9,
10, 11:
Philosophy 2
Physics 2 b ....
Botany 1
Botany 6 b
Chemistry 1 c ....
Chemistry 4
Economics 1 d ....
French 1
Sees, e, f, g, h..
French 3 a
French 4 d
Geology 6
Government 2
History 3
History 9
Latin 1 b
Philosophy 5
Zoology 4
Zoology 7
AplOl
A 108
A 100,
106,205,
206,207,
208
A 101,
104,105
Apl02
A 103
A102
A 201
S200
AplOl
AplOl
Room
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 103
A 100
A 203
A 104
Apl02
A 201
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 105,
106,205
206,207
208
A 204
S200
Ap 101
A 201
S300
S417
AplOO
A 104,
105,108,
203
A 100
A 202
Apl02
A 102
A 106
A 101
A 103
A 205
AplOl
AplOl
Wedwesdat
Biology 2
Biology 8
Botany 6e
Economics 3
English 1 a
Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10,
11
English 13
French 2
Sees, a, b, c
French 4 c
Geology 3 and 4
Greek 1
Mathematics 10 .
Philosophy 1 a
Physics 1 a
Botany 5 b
Botany 6d
Chemistry 3
Economics 1 a
English 9
English 10
French 3 b
French 4 b _...
Geology 1
Geology 7
History 8
Mathematics 1
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Philosophy 1 C
Philosophy 8
Physics 1 b
Physics 8 _.
Agricultural
Economics
Biology 1
Chemistry 7
Economics 1 b
English 14
French 1
Sees, a, b, c, d.,
French 8 c
French 4d
Geology 8
German, Beg. A..
Government 3
History 2
History 7
Latin 1 a
Mathematics 2
Physics 4
Zoology 1 ,
Room
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
A108
A 103,
106,205.
206,207
A 100
A 101,
104,105
A 202
Apl02
A 102
A 201
AplOO
S200
AplOl
S417
A 108
S300
A 201
A 104
A 105
AplOO
Apl03
A 101
A 100,
108,205,
206,207
A 106
A 102
S208
S210
Ag 104
AplOO
S417
S400
A 208
A 105,
108,204,
207
A 208
A 104
Apl02
A 201
A 205
A100
A 101
A 108
A 100
S210
AplOl -1927-28
AND SCIENCE
Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
MORNINGS
Thubsday
Botany 2
Economics 2
English 1 b
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6
French 2
Sees, d, e, f
Geology 5 and 12...
Latin 2
Latin 6
Mathematics 3
Physics 2 a .
Zoology 2
Zoology 8 _
Botany 3 _..
Botany 6 c
Chemistry 9
Economics 1 c
Economics 4 ......
English 17
French 4 a
Geology 2 _
German 1
Government 1
Greek 2
History 6
Mathematics 1
Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, II
Philosophy 2
Physics 2 b ..
Botany 1
Chemistry 1 c
Chemistry 4
Economics 1 d
French 1
Sees, e, f, g, h..
French 8 a
French 4 d.
Geology 6
Government 2
History 8
History 9
Latin lb
Philosophy 5 ..
Zoology 4
Zoology 7
Roox
A108
A100,
106,205
206,207,
208
A 101,
104,105
Apl02
A 108
A 102
A 201
S200
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 103
A 100
A 203
A 104
Apl02
A 201
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 105,
106,205,
206,207,
208
A 204
S200
AplOl
S300
S417
AplOO
A 104,
105,108,
203
A 100
A 202
Apl02
A 102
A 106
A 101
A 103
A 205
AplOl
AplOl
Fbioat
Botany 6f
Botany 7 a
Economics 3
English 1 b
Sections 7, 8, 9,
10, 11
English 13
French 2
Sees, a, b, c
French 4 c
Geology 8 and 4...
Greek 1
Mathematics 10 .....
Philosophy 1 a
Physics 1 a
Botany 5 a ..
Chemistry 2
Economics 1 a ...
English 9
English 10
French 8 b
French 4 b
Geology 7
History 8
Mathematics 1 ..
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Philosophy 1 C
Philosophy 8
Physics 1 b
Agricultural
Economics
Economics 1 b ....
English 14
French 1
Sees, a, b, c, d..
French 3 c
French 4d
Geology 8
German, Beg. A..
Government 8
History 2
History 7
Latin 1 a
Mathematics 2
Zoology 6
Zoology 5
Hook
AplOl
A 108
A 103,
106,205,
206,207
A 100
A 101,
104,105
A 202
Apl02
A 102
A 201
AplOO
S200
AplOl
S300
A 103
S400
A 201
A 104
A 105
AplOO
A 101
A 100,
108,205
206,207
A 106
A 102
S200
Ag 104
S400
A 203
A 105,
108,204,
207
A 208
A 104
Apl02
A 201
A 205
A 100
A 101
A 103
A 106
AplOl
AplOl
Saturday
Botany 5 b Lab.—
Chemistry 9 Lab....
Economics 2
English 1 a
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6 _
French 2
Sees, d, e, f .
Geology 10
Latin 2
Latin 6
Mathematics 3
Physics 2 a
Botany 5 b Lab....
Chemistry 9 Lab..
Economics 1 c
Economies 4
English 17
French 4 a
Geology 10
German 1 _
Government 1
Greek 2
History 6
Mathematics 1 ....
Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11
Philosophy 2
Physics 2 b ....
Botany 6 b Lab....
Chemistry 1 c
Chemistry 9 Lab-
Economics 1 d .
French 1
Sees, e, f, g, h...
French 8 a
French 4 d
Geology 10
Government 2
History 3
History 9
Latin lb _.
Room
A 108
A 100,
106,205,
206,207,
208
A 101,
104,105
A 103
A 102
A 201
S200
A 103
A 100
A 203
A 104
A 201
A108
A102
A 101
A105,
106,205,
206,207,
208
A 204
S200
S800
AplOO
A 104,
105,108,
208
A 100
A 202
A 102
A106
A101
A 108
10
11 AFTERNOONS
TIME TABLE
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Botany 5 Lab
Chemistry 1 a
Economics 8
English 2 b
S800
A 208
A 100,
Ap 100,
202
A 104,
105,108,
203
A 204
A101
A 102
A 207
S200
Bacteriology 1
Botany 6 e Lab.
English 8
A 201
A 101
A 105,
106,205,
206,207,
208
Biology 1 Lab. 3..
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1 a
Economics 8
English 2 a
English 7
Mathematics I
Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11
S300
A 208
French 1
A 100
French 1
Sees, i, j, k, 1
A 104,
Zoology 3 Lab. .
105,108,
1
Sees, i, j, k, 1.
French 4 c
203
A 204
Geology 7 Lab
History 4
History 4 _
Latin 4
A 101
A102
Philosophy 4
A 207
S2O0
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab
Botany 3 Lab
Botany 5 Lab
Chemistry 1 b „
Chemistry 7 Lab....
English 16
French 1
S300
A 104
A 105,
203,204
AplOO
A 100
A 101
S200
A 103
Bacteriology 1
Biology 1 Lab. 1....
Botanv 2
A 103,
106,205,
206,207
A 100
A 203
Biology 3 Lab. 3....
Botany 1 Lab. ....
Botany 6 c Lab,
Chemistry 1 b
English 16 _
French 1
Botany 4
Chemistry 1 Lab. 2
English 1 b
S300
A 104
Sees, m, n, o _
A 105,
2
Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10,
11
Geography 1 _
History 1 _
203,204
History 1
History 5
English 2 c
AplOO
Physics 4 Lab
Geology 1 Lab.
Greek 10
A 100
A 101
Physics 3 Lab.
Philosophy lb
S200
A 103
3
Bacteriology 1 fc
Botany 5 Lab m
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 7 Lab
English 12
Geology 5
A 201
Apl02
A 102
Biology 1 Lab. 1....
Botany 2 Lab
Botany 4 Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab. 2
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
English 15
A 101
A 102
Botany 1 Lab
Latin 7
Physics 3 Lab
Physics 4 Lab
Zoology 5 Lab
4
Bacteriology
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 7 Lab....
Physics 4 Lab.
Zoology 6 Lab
Biology I Lab. 2....
Botany 2 Lab
Botany 4 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 2
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Zoology 3 Lab
=
S400
Biology 1 Lab. 2....
Botany 2 Lab
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
5
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Chemistry 2 Lab. a —Continued
AFTERNOONS
Thubsday
Rook
Friday
Room
Botany 6 c Lab
English 8
English 7
Geology 1 Lab
A 201
A 101
A100,
106,205,
206,207
Chemistry 1 a .
Economics 8
English 2 a
French 1
S300
A 208
A 100
A 104,
105,108,
203
A 204
A 101
A 102
A 207
S200
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Zoology 1 Lab
Sees, i, j, k, 1
French 4 c
History 4
1
Latin 4 _....
Sociology
Botany 6 c Lab. .,
Chemistry 8 Lab. b
English 1 a
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6
A 100,
106,205,
206,207,
208
A 203
Biology 1 Lab. 5..
Chemistry 1 b
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
English 16
French 1 ...
S3ob
A 104
A 105,
203,204
AplOO
A 100
A 101
S200
A 103
Geology 1 Lab.
Greek 10
Sees, m, n, o
History 1
History 5
2
Philosophy 1 b
Biology 1 Lab. 4....
Botany 7 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
A 101
A 102
Bacteriology 1
Biology 1 Lab. 5....
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 3 Lab. a
English 12
A 201
3
Chemistry 3 Lab. b
English 15
Latin 7
Zoology 7 Lab.
Geology 1 Lab
Biology 1 Lab. 4....
Botany 6 c Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Chemistry 8 Lab. b
Zoology 1 Lab
.
Biology 1 Lab. 6..
Botany 6d Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
Zoology 7 Lab.
4
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Biology 1 Lab. 6.._
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
5 Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations
SEPTEMBER, 1927
2
Date
Wednesday,
September 14th
Thursday,
September 15th
Friday,
September 16th
Saturday,
September 17th
Monday,
September 19th
Tuesday,
September 20th
Wednesday,
September 21st
Hoar
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
First Year
History 1, 2, 3
English Literature
Latin
Chemistry 1
French ..
Geometry
Greek ..
Physics 1
Trigonometry
Algebra
English Composition
German
Biology 1
Economics 1
Geography ..
Second Year
History 1, 2, 3
English Literature
Latin
Chemistry 1, 2
French .
Geometry
Greek ..
Physics 1, 2, 3
Philosophy 1 ..
Botany 1 .
Zoology 1
Algebra . .
English Composition
Biology 1
German
Economics 1, 2
Geography
Third Year
o
9
8
8
a.
>
3
I
02
a FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.) and Master of Arts (M.A.).
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a Pass
degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses
amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar
regulations. Credits obtained at the Summer Session may be
combined with "Winter Session credits to complete a University
year. While the degree of B.A. may be obtained by attendance
at Summer Sessions, candidates are advised to attend at least
one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year.
A double course is offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc. (See
"Double Course.")
No distinction is made between Pass and Honour students
in the First and Second Years, except as regards prerequisites
for later work, but in the Third and Fourth Years there are
special requirements for Honour students.
Credit will not be given for more than 18 units in any one
Winter Session, and no student under 21 years of age, registered
in the Winter Session, will be allowed credit for more than 21
units in any one year from September to August by Winter and
Summer Session combined.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period
of not less than two or more than three hours) per week
throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent
laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
Note.—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges
who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their
intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer,
in each year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects
set down in the Calendar for the Year and course in which 66 Faculty op Arts and Science
they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent
of three units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical
Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian
Ethics and Apologetics.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30
units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must
be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow.
Details of courses are given under the various departments.
Each student must take: Units
(a) English 1 in the First Year and
English 2 in the Second Year 6
(6) The first two courses in a language
offered for Matriculation, one course
in each year.; 6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year 3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 3,
or Philosophy 1 3
(e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1 3
(/) Three courses—not already chosen—
selected from the following:—
Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1,
Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1, Geology 2,
•Beginners' German, German 1,
German 2, ^Beginners' Greek, Greek
1, Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 3, Latin 1, Latin 2, Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1, Physics 1,
Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1 9
•See Regulations "2" and "3". Pass Courses 67
Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and
2 and History 3 are not open to
First Year students. Economics 1,
and Philosophy 1 are open to First
Year students only if the permission
of the Heads of these departments is
obtained. History 2 is open to
First Year students only if they
are preparing for entrance to the
Normal School.
2. No student in his First Year may elect more than one
beginners' course in language, and no beginners' course in
language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second
year's work in that language. I
3. Except in the case of beginners' eourses, no course in
language may be taken by a student who has not offered that
language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in language
may not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained
credit for that language at Matriculation.
4. A student taking three languages in the first two years
may defer the course selected under e (above) to the Third or
Fourth Year.
Note:—The following special conditions affecting admission
to Applied Science are given for the information of students
intending to enter that Faculty:
(a) Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation or equivalent (as for Arts).
(b) All other courses require:
(i) Junior Matriculation or equivalent,
(ii) Also a First Year Arts Course or equivalent,
which shall include the following subjects:
Chemistry 1; Mathematics 1, (Algebra, Geometry
and Trigonometry); Physics 1, or 2; English 1;
Latin 1, or French 1, or German B. 68 Faculty op Arts and Science
The passing grade is 50 per cent, for Chemistry, Physics
and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass
grade of 40 per cent, will be accepted, provided an average
of 50 per cent, has been obtained in the total.
Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and, if
passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be taken
in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted in
lieu of Economics in Applied Science. A reading kuowledge of
French and German is desirable for students in Engineering.
No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental
in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics
or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplemental in other
subjects to the extent of more than three units.
Students who have failed to complete the above requirements may apply for permission to take the September Supplemental Examinations in Arts.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit
to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year,
a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last
two years.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consists
of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year,
not less than 15 units.
PASS CURRICULUM
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major
subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of 6
units in some other subject or subjects. Work in the First or
Second Year is required in each of the Major subjects, except in
the case of Bacteriology. Both Major subjects must be chosen
from one of the following groups:
(a) Chemistry, Bacteriology, Botany, Geology, Physics,
Zoology.
(b) Chemistry, Physics, Mathematics.
(c) Economics, Philosophy, Mathematics. Honour Courses 69
(d) English, Greek, Latin, French, German, History,
Economics, Philosophy.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth
Years are given under the various departments.
•First and Second Year courses may be taken in the Third
or Fourth Year, but only with the consent of the Department
concerned and of the Department in which the candidate is
doing his major work, and no such course (with the exception
of Third and Fourth Year subjects which are open to Second
Year students) will be counted for more than 2 units in the
Third or Fourth Year. But the Department in which such
a course is taken may supplement it by a reading course or
special course counting one unit.
No credit will be given for a language course normally
taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and
continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are
intended for Honour students only.
3. During the Fourth Year one course of private reading,
to count not more than 3 units, may be taken with the consent
of the department concerned.
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour
courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned
and of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a
clear academic record at the end of their Second Year with at
least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses
may be obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone
or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a
single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be
taken in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For
Honours in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in
each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
*Thls regulation applies to students in Pass courses only, and
an exception is made in the case of Greek 1 and German 1. 70 Faculty op Arts and Science
3. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the
department or departments concerned, be required to present a
graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation
that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating
essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units.
4. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their
Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or
both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide.
This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of
his chosen subject or subjects as a whole and is in addition to
the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
5. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class.
Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have
not attained a sufficiently high ranking may be awarded a pass
degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class
Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned
agree; and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high ranking.
6. The following Honour courses are regularly offered, and
other Honour courses may be arranged with the department
or departments concerned.
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Botany 1.
Physics 1 and Zoology 1 are required before completion of the
course and should be taken as early as possible. Students are
advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not
specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses
should be selected in consultation with the department.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 and Botany 1 are required before completion of Honour Courses 71
the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students
are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8; courses in Botany;
Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following
courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10.
Classics
Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7, and any three of
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek
8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will
be set on sight translation; and the candidate is advised to
pursue a course of private reading under the supervision of the
department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature
and History. J
* Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department, and a graduating essay which will
count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Work in this department should be supplemented by a
course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 19 (involving an examination on the life, 72 Faculty op Arts and Science
times, and complete works of some major English author), 20,
21 (a), 21 (o), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in
both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the
final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take a final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, on the History of English
Literature. In the award of Honours special importance will
be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours
Examination.
If the candidate's work outside the department does not
include a course in English History, he must take an examination
in that subject.
Geology
Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 should be
taken. Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 should be taken in the First
Year. Zoology 1, to which Biology 1 is prerequisite, should be
taken in the Third Year in preparation for Geology 6.
Course:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 10, 12.
History
Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will
count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit) must be
attended in either the Third or the Fourth Year. A reading
knowledge of French is required.
French
Course:—French 3 (a), 3 (6), 3 (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (6), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and
4. Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among the
requisite 18 units. A final Honours Examination is required. Combined Honour Courses 73
Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 4, and 12
additional units.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany 1,
or Zoology 1.
Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and-Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1.
Course:—Geology 2, 3 and 6; the required courses for either
the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course
in Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2;
Biology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 4, 7
or 9, and 8 or 10. Candidates are advised to take Mathematics 10.
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Geology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units
in Geology. 74 Faculty op Arts and Science
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1; Mathematics 1
and 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in
Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2.
Course .-—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics 10, 16 and 17.
Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3 if not already
taken, and Physics 4.
(h) Any two of:
Economics, English, French, History, Latin, Philosophy.
Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Any 12 units, including Economics 2, if not
already taken.
English
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English
courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended
during both of the final years, but credits which count for the
B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year.
A final Honours Examination, written or oral, or both, is
required on the History of English Literature since 1500.
French
Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French
subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either
these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (6) are intended primarily for Honour
students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they
are not required to make up the minimum number of units. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 75
History
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French.
Course:—History 4 or 5 and any 9 additional units, of
which the graduating essay, if written in History, will count
3 units.
The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended
in either the Third or Fourth Year.
Latin
Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the
final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight
translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities.
Private reading under the direction of the department is
recommended.
Philosophy
Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in
each year. t
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree
from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such
a student in this University. The fee for examination of
certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(i) To do two or more years of private work under the
supervision of the University, such work to be
equivalent to one year of graduate study; or 76 Faculty op Arts and Science
(ii) To do one year of private work under University
supervision and one term of resident graduate
study, the total of such work to be equivalent to
one year of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized
thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of
"Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar by October 15th.
7. The following requirements apply to all Departments:
Prerequisites:
Minor:—For a minor, at least six units of work regularly
offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be
prerequisite.
For details or requirements, see regulations of
the several Departments.
Major:—For a major, at least eight units of work regularly
offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be
prerequisite.
For details of requirements, see regulations of the
several Departments.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined
above during their undergraduate course may fulfil the same
by devoting more than one academic year's study to the
M.A. work.
M. A. Courses:
Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses. Examinations to be written, or oral, or both at the discretion
of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
subjects of the minor. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 77
Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses, of which
units three to six shall be counted for the thesis.
All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination may
be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of
the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
work of the major.
Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of M.A.
who has not satisfied the Head of the Department with which he
is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in
French or in German.
Students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to come
up for final examination in less than two academic years after
registration as M.A. students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by
different departments:
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Botany 1, and eight additional units
including Zoology 1.
M. A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete required units.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology. 78 Faculty op Arts and Science
Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units,
including Botany 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to
complete the required number of units.
Economics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—The B.A. degree involving credit for at least fifteen
units of work in subjects in the Department, or an
equivalent.
Major:—The B.A. degree with Honours in Economics; or in
Economics in combination with some other subject;
or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department
must attend the Honour Seminar.
English
Prerequisites:
Minor:—At least nine units of credit for English courses
elective in the Third and Fourth years of the
undergraduate curriculum.
Major:—At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective
in the Third and Fourth years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced courses in English
not already taken.
Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses
not already taken, one of which courses must
be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has
not been previously offered for credit. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 79
(b) A graduating essay which will count as an
advanced course involving three units of credit.
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English
Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or
German. A student who offers both languages
will be allowed three units of credit towards the
M.A. degree.
With French
Detailed Study:
(a) O.F.—Aucassin and Nicolette.
(b) XVIth Century—-Montaigne, EsSais (Hatier). Chefs-
d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle (Hatier).
Less Detailed: A
(c) XVIIth Century and after-^-The evolution of the French
Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le Breton's
Roman au XVIIe sidcle—Roman au XVIIIe si&cle, and
the chief Romantic Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville.
Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le
Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La poesie au 19e siecle.
(Oxford). Alfred de Musset, ThSdtre. (Oxford).
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. (Fasquelle).
(f) A general knowledge of French literary history from
XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be
detailed, but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the
Head of the Department.
Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read
and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of
Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet,
Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac,
Flaubert, Anatole France. 80 Faculty of Arts and Science
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts,
and advice in reading, but the Department cannot undertake to
cover the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus.
History
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History
4 to 9 inclusive.
Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from
History 4 to 9 inclusive.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History
4 to 9 inclusive; or the equivalent in reading
courses. All candidates for a minor in History
must attend the Honour Seminar.
Major:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History
4 to 9 inclusive. A thesis embodying original
work to which 3 units of credit is given. All candidates for a major in History must attend the
Honour Seminar. Examinations shall be written
and oral. Candidates for a major will be examined
orally on their thesis and their major field. An
average of 75 per cent, is required to qualify in
the work of a major.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at leaest two other Honour
Courses.
Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour
Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to
be chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis. Examinations and Advancement 81
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students,
are held in December and in April. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close
of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea
for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be
presented.
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject,
except in the case of the First and Second Years when the work
of either year is taken as a whole in one session, in which case an
aggregate of 50 per cent, will be required and not less than 40
per cent, in each subject. In Beginners' Greek and Beginners'
German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80
per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations
of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him
supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which
he has failed, but a student obtaining less than 30 per cent, in
a subject will not be granted a supplemental examination in that
subject, except with the consent of the Faculty. Notice will
be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been
granted.
5. Supplemental examinations will be held in September
and will not be granted at any other time, except by special
permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per
paper. To pass a supplemental examination, a candidate must
obtain at least 50 per cent. A candidate with a supplemental
examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer
Session curriculum may clear his record by attending the
Summer Session course in the subject and passing the required
examinations.
6. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied 82 Faculty op Arts and Science
by the necessary fees (See schedule of Fees) must be in the
hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set
for the examinations.
7. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental
examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units of
the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty.
Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied
that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause.
8. A student may not continue in a later year any subject
in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from
an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the
Second Year.
9. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects
of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat
his year will be exempt from attending lectures and passing
examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least
50 per cent. In this ease he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the
following year.
10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year,
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or
Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. Bacteriology 83
12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and,
in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Instructor: Freda L. Wilson.
Assistant: Helen M. Mathews.
1. General Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature,
the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and
isolation, and various bactericidal substances and conditions will
be studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household science, and public health will be carefully considered.
Text-book:—Thomas, Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Jordan
only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1, and Biology 1.
Seven hours a week. First Term. 2 units.
2. Special Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together with the reaction of the animal body against invasion by
these bacteria. The course will include studies in immunity
and the various diagnostic methods in use in public health
laboratories.
Text-book:—Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition,
Saunders.
Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units. 84 Faculty op Arts and Science
3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
2 units.
4. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
iy2 units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology:—A reading and laboratory
course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour
per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged
with the class.
Text-books:—Kolmer, Infection and Immunity. Jordan,
General Bacteriology, Latest Editions, Saunders.
Prerequisites:—Bacteriology 1 and 2. 3 units.
6. Soil Bacteriology:—A laboratory and lecture course, in
which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility.
Text-book:—Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural
Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1.
Five hours a week. First term. 2 units.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Assistant Professor: John Davidson.
Assistant Professor: Frank Dickson.
Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: Braham G. Griffith.
Assistant: C. W. Argue.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and
Zoology. Botany , 85
Text-book: — Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea &
Febiger, 1920.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Principles of Genetics:—The fundamentals of Genetics
illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and animals;
the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired
characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Text-book:—Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Prerequisite:—Biology 1.
Two lectures per week. First Term. 1 unit.
3. General Physiology:—A study of animal and plant life
processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having
prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department
should be consulted.
Text-book:—Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans, Green.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
Reference reading. Second Term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany:—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany,
except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course
(2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Morphology:—A comparative study of plant structures.
The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-histories.
Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant
structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a
progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence
of parts. 86 Faculty op Arts and Science
Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
Text-book:—V. I. Palladin, Plant Physiology, English
Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, Blakiston.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work per week.
First Term. 2 units.
4. Histology:—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books:—Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant
Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units
5. Systematic Botany.
5 (a) Economic Flora:—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine
and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and
poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Texts:—Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University
of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed
Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
Term. iy2 units.
5 (6) Dendrology:—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. Botany 87
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Text-books:—Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington,
D.C.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours' laboratory
or field work per week.
5 (e) Descriptive Taxonomy:—An advanced course dealing
with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering
plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work.
Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature.
Prerequisites:—Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Texts:—Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley
& Sons, N. Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage
& Co., Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
6 (a) General Plant Pathology:—Identification and life
histories of pathogens causing disease of some common economic
plants; means of combating them.
Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
One lecture and two hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 1 unit.
6 (b) Forest Pathology:—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests.
Text-book:—Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory per week during one-
half of the Second Term. y2 unit-
6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary):—A course similar to
6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases studied.
Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill. 88 Faculty op Arts and Science
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 2 units.
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced):—A course designed for
Honour or Graduate students. Technique; isolation and culture
work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the
progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures.
Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology:—A course designed to give the student a
general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view.
Text-books:—Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1. ^
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Credit
will be given for a collection of fungi made during the summer
preceding the course. First Term. 2 units.
6 (/) History of Plant Pathology:—A lecture course dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from
ancient times to the present.
Text-book:—Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture per week. Second Term. y2 unit.
7. Plant Ecology.
7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography:—The inter-relations
of forest trees and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and
regions; physiography.
Text-book:—M. E. Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford
University Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work per
week. First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately
fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life Chemistry 89
of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous
knowledge of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters,
and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as
possible, illustrative material will be selected from the flora of
British Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or
laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part
of the course.
No examination is required except in the case of University
students desiring credit (two units) for this course. Other
students desiring to ascertain their standing in the class may
apply for a written test.
A detailed statement of requirements, and work covered in
this course, is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had
on request.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: E. H. Archibald.
Professor of Organic Chemistry: R. H. Clark.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Assistant Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Instructor: John Allardyce.
Lecturer: M. Neal Carter.
Assistant: R. W. Ball.
Assistant: D. F. Stedman.
Assistant: A. P. Gallaugher.
Assistant: R. H. Ball.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book:—Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribners.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. 90 Faculty op Arts and Science
(a) Qualitative Analysis. — One lecture and six hours
laboratory per week throughout the First Term. (During the
first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work.)
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-books:—A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan;
Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney & Jackson.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second
Term, 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Books recommended:—Holleman-Walker, Text-book of
Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods
of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the
development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena,
the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule.
Text-book:—James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature. Chemistry 91
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. First Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 3 units.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries, which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry, will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will
be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in
the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases,
thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the
dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the physical
properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their chemical
constitutions.
Text-books: — Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements,
Longmans.
For reference:—Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical
Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3 and '4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
8. Electro-Chemistry. — Solutions are studied from the
standpoint of the osmotic and the dissociation theories. The
laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary
and secondary cells are considered in some detail.
For reference:—Le Blanc, Elements of Electro-Chemistry,
Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electro-Chemistry, 92 Faculty op Arts and Science
Vol. I, John Wiley & Sons; Allmand, Applied Electro-Chemistry,
Longmans, Green.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 4.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—Important organic reactions will be discussed. The Carbohydrates, Proteins, Enzyme
Action, Terpenes and Alkaloids will be studied in more or less
detail. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen,
nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made with the view of
identifying organic compounds.
For reference:—Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be paid
to the development of chemical theory.
For reference:—Von Meyer-McGowan, History of Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisites:—-Chemistry 2, 3, and 4.
Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
11. Stereochemistry.—Stereochemical theories will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and chemical and
physico-chemical methods employed in determining the constitution of organic compounds will be studied.
The lectures may be taken without the laboratory work.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 7 and 9.
Lectures: 2 units. Laboratory, three hours per week.
3 units.
12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and the
application of colloidal chemistry to industry.
For reference:—Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vol. I and II,
McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen; Reports
on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for Advancement
of Science.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit. Classics 93
14. Organic Agricultural. Chemistry.—An introduction to
the compounds of carbon, with special applications to problems
in agriculture. The laboratory work will be adapted to the needs
of the individual student.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
15. Dairy Chemistry.—The chemistry of the carbohydrates,
fats, and proteins will be discussed in outline, and the chemical
processes involved in enzyme action and fermentation will receive
consideration.
Text-book:—Chamberlain, Agricultural Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
One lecture and three hours laboratory per week. 2 units.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Derivation of fundamental
equations and application to the gas laws, theory of solutions,
chemical equilibrium, electrochemistry and capillarity. Stud;,
of the quantum theory and the Nernst heat theorem.
Text-book:—Saekur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan. Reference:—Lewis & Randall, Principles of
Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 7.
Two lectures per week. Second Term. 1 unit.
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed
treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible in
Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare Elements.
Prerequisite—Chemistry 2 and 4.
Three lectures per week. 3 units.
Department of Classics
Professor: Lemuel Robertson.
Professor of Greek: O. J. Todd.
Associate Professor: H. T. Logan.
Assistant: H. A. Thompson.
Greek
Beginners' Greek.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. I-
XLVIII; Copp, Clark.
Four hours a week. Mr. Thompson. 3 units. 94 Faculty op Arts and Science
1. Lectures.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. XLIX-
LXXX. Xenophon, Anabasis I and IV, Goodwin and White,
Ginn.
History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. I-V,
Unwin.
Four hours a week. Mr. Logan. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Dyer-Seymour, Ginn; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Wecklein-Allen, Ginn.
Composition—Arnold's Greek Prose Composition, Abbott,
Longmans. Selected passages will occasionally be set for Unseen
Translation.
History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. VI-X,
Unwin.
Four hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant,
Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Heracles, Byrde, Oxford.
Literature.—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature,
American Book Company. | *
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2
Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac, First and Third
Philippics, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I.).
Literature.—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature,
American Book Company.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures. — Herodotus, History, Hude, Oxford (the
equivalent of one book will be read); Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude, Oxford; Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and
Geldart, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are
taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Classics 95
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford;
Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only
to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One hour a week. Mr. Todd. 1 unit.
10. Greek Literature in English Translation.—A survey of
Greek literary history from Homer to Lucian, with reading and
interpretation of selected works from the most important authors.
Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Members of the course will provide themselves with the
following books: Aeschylus, translated by Campbell (Oxford);
Sophoeles, translated by Campbell (Oxford); Euripides, Medea
and Alcestis, translated by Murray (Allen and Unwin); Austo-
phanes, translated by Frere, Vol. I (Dutton).
Two hours a week. Mr. Todd. 2 units.
For those who wish to extend the work to 3 units additional
reading will be provided.
Latin
1. Lectures.—Cicero, De Senectute, Shuckburgh-Egbert,
Macmillan, N. Y.; Ovid, Elegiac Selections, Smith, Bell.
Composition.—Bradley, Arnold's Latin Prose Composition,
Longmans, to exercise 19.
History.—Boak, A History of Rome to 565 A.D., Macmillan,
chapters 1 to 13.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd, Mr. Thompson.
A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the
Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is
voluntary and no formal credit is given. 96 Faculty op Arts and Science
2. Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan;
Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace Odes II, Page,
Macmillan.
History.—Boak, A History of Rome to 565 A.D., Macmillan,
chapters 14 to 20.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the
Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is
voluntary and no formal credit is given.
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Sloman, Oxford; Virgil,
Aeneid, Page, Macmillan.
Literature:—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Cicero,
Selected Letters, Pritchard & Bernard, Oxford.
Literature: Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. Mr. Logan, Mr. Robertson. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca,
Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan. (Open only to those who
have taken or are taking, Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories I, II, Godley, Macmillan;
Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (Selections), Oxford.
(Open only to those who have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd.' 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D.
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heit-
land, Cambridge; A History of the Roman Empire, Bury,
Murray.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Economics 97
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One hour a week. Mr. Todd. 1 unit.
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Professor: Theodore H. Boggs.
Associate Professor: H. F. Angus.
Assistant Professor: S. E. Beckett.
Lecturer: N. A. Robertson.
Assistant: George Allen.
Assistant: Doris Lee.
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of
value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc.
Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan; The Canada Year Book, 1926.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in the
department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2,
or Government 1. This rule may be waived in the case of
students of the Department of Nursing who may find it impossible to take both Economics 1 and Sociology 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. History of Economic Life and Economic Thought.—a
brief outline of Economic Thought, and of Economic and Social
conditions in England previous to 1776. A survey of the more
important phases of European Organization from the time of the
Middle Ages, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution,
the Progress of Agriculture, and resultant social conditions. The
development of modern Economic Thought, with a study of the
influence of Smith, Malthus, Ricardo, Mill and others, and
the place of the Deductive and Historical Methods.
Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution, Longmans. Marshall 98 Faculty op Arts and Science
and Lyon, Our Economic Organization, Macmillan; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise
of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the
more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada,
and the United States. A critical analysis of various solutions
of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing,
co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management,
labour legislation and socialism.
Hoxie, Trade Unionism in the United States, Appleton.
Cole, Guild Socialism, Stokes. Carpenter, Guild Socialism,
Appleton. Simkhovitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams &
Norgate; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of
money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage,
credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in
the leading countries, with particular reference to Canada.
Robertson, Money, Nisbet. Foster and Catchings, Money,
Houghton Mifflin. Dunbar, Theory and History of Banking,
Putnam, 1917. Phillips, Readings in Money and Banking,
Macmillan; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with
the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of
public funds. Topics examined include: growth of taxation
methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase,
economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference
to Canada, Britain and other countries; the single tax; double
taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation;
flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans. Economics 99
Lutz, Public Finance, Appleton, 1924; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the
theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; and a
study of the commercial policy of the leading countries, with
considerable attention to the British Dominions.
Bastable, The Theory of International Trade, Macmillan,
1903. Taussig, Selected Readings in International Trade and
Tariff Problems, Ginn; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of tht
different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint-stock company, and the corporation, and the later
developments, such as the pool, trust, combination, and holding
company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy toward corpora- *
tions, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
8. Provincial and Local Finance. — A brief summary of
fundamental principles of taxation. Sources of revenue, and
tax systems of federal, and provincial and municipal governments, especially of British Columbia. Problems of War Finance.
Chief problems of provincial and municipal finance and
administration. Separation of sources of provincial and municipal revenues. Methods of municipal supervision and control.
Government debts.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 100 Faculty op Arts and Science
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics
as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural
surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm
income, and the share of Agriculture in the national income.
Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver,
Nourse, and others.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to
the individual farttn and to Agriculture as a whole. The general
principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products
as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements,
co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat,
fruit and milk in Canada.
Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers; Mackintosh,
Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press,
Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Hib-
bard, Boyle, Benton, and others.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Government
1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with the
nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization
of government in the British Empire, the United States of
America, France, and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey
of Legal History, (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of govern- Education 101
ment within the British Empire, to be given in alternate years
with Economics 7.
Readings to be assigned.
Government 1 is a prerequisite of this course, but may be
taken concurrently with it.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
Sociology
1. Principles of Sociology.—An introductory study of early
man and his relation to his environment; of races of men and
their distribution; of the early forms and development of
industrial organization, marriage and the family, arts and
sciences, religious systems, government, classes, rights, etc. A
review also of certain of the social problems of modern society
growing out of destitution, crime, overcrowding, etc. A critical
survey of schemes for betterment.
Blackmar & Gillin, Outlines of Sociology, Macmillan. Beach,
An Introduction to Sociology and Social Problems, Houghton-
Mifflin Company.
Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units.
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.
Assistant Professor: Jennie Benson Wyman.
Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman.
Lecturers in High School Methods: the following Heads of Depart-
. ments: E. H. Archibald, H. Ashton, D. Buchanan, T. C. Hebb,
L. Robertson, W. N. Sage (Acting Head), G. G. Sedgewick,
also W. K. Beech and C. H. Scott of the Vancouver School staff.
Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: A. Anstey, A. R. Lord,
F. W. Dyke, C. H. Scott, R, Straight, Miss E. J. Trembath.
Courses in Education
Teacher Training Course
1. Explanatory Statement
At the request of the Provincial Department of Education,
the University undertook, in September, 1923, the direction of
the professional training of candidates for the Academic
Certificate. 102 Faculty op Arts and Science
Courses in elementary methods and in the special subjects
of the elementary school curriculum were provided in the Provincial Normal School, and facilities for practice teaching were
furnished through the kindness of the Vancouver School Board
and the Principal and Staff of the King Edward High School.
These courses were open only to University graduates, and the
original registration was 55.
The Dean of Arts and Science acted as provisional director
and lecturer in the History and Principles of Education and in
Educational Psychology. In November, 1923, Dr. George M.
Weir, Principal of the Provincial Normal School, Saskatoon,
Sask., was appointed Professor of Education and Director of
Teacher Training, and assumed the duties of his office January
1, 1924.
Lecturers on Methods in High School subjects were
appointed from the University staff.
2. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science
from a recognized university must be submitted to the University
Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of The University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connection
with the Teacher Training course should be addressed to the
University Registrar, from whom registration cards may be
procured.
3. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session, successful candidates
in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the
Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate, and to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University
Diploma in Education. Successful candidates will be graded as
follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second
Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the
University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in
the various Faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of
the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures. Education 103
First or Second Class standing in History and Principles
of Education and in Educational Psychology of the Teacher
Training Course is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an M.A.
degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the
Department in which the student wishes to Major.
4. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science
After 1928 candidates admitted to Courses in High School
Methods will be required to have taken the equivalent of a minor
(6 units) in the corresponding pass courses of undergraduate
work.
Students in the Teacher Training Course will find it to
their advantage to have taken at least one class in Psychology
during their undergraduate course.
5. Courses Offered
A. Throughout the University Session.
(1) Educational Psychology:
Text: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education,
Macmillan.
References: Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees
It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence and Character, Longman; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Appleton.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or its equivalent—obligatory from 1929.
(2) School Administration and Law:
Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control,
Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School Law, British Columbia.
References: Cubberley, Public School Administration,
Houghton, Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal and His
School, Houghton, Mifflin; Perry, The Management of a
City School, Macmillan (Revised Edition) ; Davis, Junior
High School Education, World Book Company; Johnson,
Administration and Supervision of the High School, Ginn &
Co.; Report of the School Survey Commission, British Columbia; assigned readings. 104 Faculty op Arts and Science
(3) History and Principles of Education:
(a) Educational leaders and movements with special
reference to the period since 1800.
(b) Educational systems:—Canada with special reference to British Columbia; England; France; Germany ; the United States.
Texts: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education,
Houghton Mifflin. Chapman and Counts, Principles of
Education, Houghton Mifflin.
References: Birchenough, History of Elementary Education in England and Wales, University Tutorial Press;
Sandiford, Comparative Education, J. M. Dent; Balfour,
Educational Systems of Great Britain and Ireland, Oxford ;
Farrington, Public Primary School System of France,
Columbia University; Kandel, The Reform of Secondary
Education in France, Columbia University; Alexander, The
Prussian Elementary Schools, Macmillan; Kandel, Twenty-
five Years of American Education, Macmillan; Cubberley,
Readings in the History of Education, Houghton Mifflin.
(4) Educational Tests, Measurements and Statistics:
Text: Hines, A Guide to Educational Measurements,
Houghton Mifflin.
References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World
Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination,
Scott Foresman & Co.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
B. During the Fall Term.
(1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects:
Texts: Freeman, The Psychology of the Common
Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton Mifflin. English 105
References: Stormzand, Progressive Methods of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charters, Teaching the Common
Branches, Houghton Mifflin.
Assigned readings from the Year Books and Educational Journals.
(2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects:
Assigned Readings.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
C. During the Spring Term.
(1) Methods in High School Subjects:
Text: Judd, Psychology of High School Subjects,
Ginn & Co.
References: Parker, Methods of Teaching in High
Schools, Ginn & Co. \
Assigned readings.
Three (3) courses are prescribed (two obligatory and
one optional). Nine hours a week.
6. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching
1. Fall Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary
schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
2. Spring Term: At least sixty (60) hours in the high
schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Associate Professor: W. L. MacDonald.
Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
Assistant Professor: F. C. Walker.
Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert.
Assistant Professor: Frank H. Wilcox.
Assistant: Sallee Murphy.
Assistant: Dorothy Wroughton.
First Year
1. (o) Literature. — Elementary study of a number of 106 Faculty op Arts and Science
literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the
novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1927-28: Hastings, Clough and Mason, Short
Stories, Houghton Mifflin. Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert
Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan,
The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House,
Everyman. An Anthology of Modern Verse, Methuen.
Two hours a week.
(6) Composition. — Elementary forms and principles of
composition.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class
exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be
required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of
the work.
Second Year
2. (a) Literature. — Studies in the history of English
Literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and
movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Neilson and
Thorndike, A History of English Literature, Macmillan. Century Readings in English, ed. Cunliffe, Century Publishing Co.
Two hours a week.
(b) Composition.—Narrative and descriptive themes; the
writing of reports.
One hour a week. 3 units.
(c) Literature.—Readings from Nineteenth Century poetry
since 1830.
For this course, which is intended for prospective Honour
students in English and for others especially interested in the
study of Literature, no formal credit is given.
One hour a week.
Third and Fourth Years
The curriculum in English for students of the Third and
Fourth Years is arranged in three divisions. The first includes a English 107
central body of general courses which will be offered, as far as
possible, every year, and to each of which are assigned 3 units
of credit. In the second division are listed courses carrying 2
units of credit and usually given in alternate years. And the
third consists of courses designed especially for Honour and
Graduate students, and open to others only by special permission.
Candidates for honours are referred to Page 111.
Division I
9. Shakespeare.—This course may be taken for credit in two
successive years. In 1927-28, 9 (a) will be given as follows:
i. A detailed study of the text of Romeo and Jxdiet,
Henry TV, Part I, Hamlet, The Tempest.
ii. Lectures on Shakespeare's development, on his use
of sources, and on his relation to the stage and the
dramatic practice of his time.
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of
the four plays named above, and with The Facts about Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised
to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford
Shakespeare, ed. Craig.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
9 (b). (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of
the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of
Tragedy. The main subject of the course, however, is Elizabethan Drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality
Plays and in the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe;
(3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its decline in
Johnson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster, Massinger,
Shirley, and Ford.
Texts:—Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse,
World's Classics, Oxford. F. T. Tickner, Earlier English Drama, 108 Faculty op Arts and Science
Nelson. Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson. Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed.
Neilson.
Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time.
—The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs.
Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray,
and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, and a few
representative novelists now living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott,
Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those
taking this course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to
give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents
of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800.
From year to year various periods will be stressed and the work
of various writers emphasized. Generally speaking, the course is
mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope,
Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of
Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott.
Texts: The Oxford editions of the first five poets named.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1780-1830.
Three hours a week. Mr. Walker. 3 units.
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with
the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks
at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the
development of later poetry down to the work of Hardy.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge English 109
Edition. Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition. Tennyson, Poems,
Globe Edition. Page, British Poets of the Nineteenth Century,
Sanborn.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1830-1880.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 3 units.
19. Private Reading.—Students of the Senior Year may
pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the Department, a course of private reading. In such courses examinations
will be set, but no class instruction will be given. 3 units.
Division II
5. The Elements of Poetics.—Studies in the criticism and
appreciation of poetry; the poetic frame of mind; the emotional
element in poetry; poetic content and the nature of poetic truth;
poetic form and its varieties; metrics; contemporary developments in poetry; literary criticism, its nature and function; and
an outline of aesthetic theory from Aristotle to Croce. Exercises
in criticism and metrical composition.
Winchester, Principles of Literary Criticism.
Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
6. Narrative Writing.—A study of narrative composition:
(a) critical reading of a considerable number of modern short
stories and of two or three modern novels; (o) frequent critical
and narrative themes.
Only a limited number of students will be admitted to this
course.
Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units.
(Not given in 1927-28.)
7. Technique of the Drama.—A practical study of dramatie
form and structure based on the analysis of modern plays, with
special reference to the one-act play as an art form. Playmaking,
by Wm. Archer, and Representative One-act Plays by British
and Irish Authors, Little, Brown, are the texts used in this
course.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 110 Faculty op Arts and Science
8. English Poetry, exclusive of the Drama, from the death
of Chaucer to 1649—(1) The Renaissance; (2) the Fifteenth
Century; (3) the Scottish Chaucerians; (4) John Skelton and
the poets of the Transition; (5) the Elizabethan Lyric; (6) the
Sonneteers; (7) Spenser and the Spenserians; (8) the Jacobean
Poets; (9) the Caroline Poets; (10) the Theory of Poetry
throughout the period.
Texts:—Ward, The English Poets, Vol. I. Spenser, ed
Smith and de Selincourt, Oxford.
Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
11. English Drama since 1600.—A survey of English drama
from the time of Ben Jonson to the present. Later Elizabethan
drama, representative plays of the Restoration, the works of
Goldsmith, Sheridan, and of early Nineteenth Century writers
will be considered. There will follow a study of some dramatists
of recent years, including Wilde, Shaw, Galsworthy, Pinero,
Jones, Stephen Phillips, Barrie, and the Irish School.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
12. Narrative Poetry. — Discussion of the types,—epic,
ballad, and romance,—with readings, in suitable translations or
modern versions where desirable; modern ballads and metrical
romances represented by the work of Scott, Tennyson, Morris,
Masefield and others.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
15. American Literature.—A survey of the principal writers
of this continent during the Nineteenth Century.
Texts: Broadus, A Book of Canadian Prose and Verse,
Oxford. Foerster, American Prose and Poetry, Houghton,
Mifflin.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28.) English 111
18. Social, literary, religious and scientific movements of
the Victorian period: Carlyle, Ruskin, Macaulay, Newman, Darwin, Mill, Arnold, Butler, Stevenson.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29.)
Division III
20. Chaucer and Middle English.— (a) Middle English
grammar with the reading of representative texts. (6) The
Canterbury Tales.
Texts: A Middle English reader and the Oxford Chaucer,
ed. Skeat.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
21a. Anglo-Saxon—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old
English, George Wahr. Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Henry
Holt.
Two hours a week. Mr. Walker. 2 units.
21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week after Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
22. Studies in Linguistic History. — Origins, growth, and
development of the English language. A brief introduction to
Germanic philology; the Indo - European language group;
Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and
Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds,
and meanings.
Two hours a week before Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation.
The subject for 1927-28 will probably be the life and work of
Keats.
Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units. 112 Faculty op Arts and Science
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: T. C. Phemister.
Lecturer: E. M. Burwash.
Assistant: W. A. Jones.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures:
(a) Physical Geology, including: weathering, the work of
the wind, the work of ground water, the work of streams, the
work of glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structure of the
earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamor-
phism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First
Term. Mr. Schofield.
(b) Historical Geology, including: the earth before the
Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic, and
Quaternary eras.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second
Term. Mr. Williams.
The Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology include the
study and identification of the commonest minerals and rocks,
the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and
the study of structures by the use of models.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures.
The Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology consist of
the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations,
their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence
in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken
up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North
America. Geology 113
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference Books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
Mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Manual of Mineralogy, revised by Ford
(new edition), Wiley. (For students taking only Geology 2 (a).)
Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
(For students who subsequently take Geology 2 (6).)
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First
Term. Mr. Phemister. iy2 units.
2. (6) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This
course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2(a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second
Term. Mr. Phemister. V/2 units.
3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life with special reference to North America. 114 Faculty op Arts and Science
Text-book: Schubert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours per week, First Term. Mr. Williams.
iy2 units.
4. Structural and PhySiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours per week, Second Term. Mr. Schofield.
ly2 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week. 3 units.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American
Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week.
Mr. Williams. 3 units.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
the following: (a) Optical Mineralogy, (b) Lithology and
Petrogeny, (c) Microscopical Petrography. Geology 115
Lectures deal with the principles of crystal optics, and with
the origin, occurrence, classification, metamorphism and decay
of rocks.
Laboratory Work consists of the study, determination and
classification of specimens, structures and textures of rocks
contained in the departmental collections. Field and microscopical methods of determination are equally stressed.
Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley.
Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of
Rockforming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press.
Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours per
week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw-
Hill.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits. Ries, Economic Geology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report. 116 Faculty op Arts and Science
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of
the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
Two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Phemister. 1 unit.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
Three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. \y2 units.
12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in a
general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments,
constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. \y2 units.
Geography
1. Principles of Geography. — A general course dealing
especially with the effects of the physical features of the earth
upon life, and the ways in which various forms of life respond
to their physical environment. The following topics are studied:
earth relations; earth features; climate and climatic factors;
oceans; materials of the land and their uses; changes of the
earth's surface; coasts, plains, plateaus, mountains, inland
waters, and their relations to life; human geography.
Text-book: Salisbury, Barrows and Tower, Elements of
Geography, Holt.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield.
3 units. History 117
10. Introduction to Geography.—A brief introduction to
the study of modern Geography, outlining the history and
content of the subject, physical geography and human geography.
One lecture a week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 1 unit.
Department of History
Professor: Mack Eastman.
Associate Professor: W. N. Sage.
Assistant Professor: F. H. Soward.
Special Lecturer: H. L. Keenleyside.
Assistant: Stanley Moodie.
Students who intend to specialize in History are advised
to associate with it from the first some allied subject, such as
Economics. Economics 1, 2, 3, Government 1 and Sociology 1
will be found especially helpful.
A reading knowledge of French and German will be found
extremely valuable in Third and Fourth Year courses, while in
certain classes of more advanced work Latin is indispensable.
Hereafter, French at least will be required for Honour work.
A list of books for reading and reference may be obtained
from the professor in charge of each course.
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Modern World History.—This course
is intended primarily for First Year students and covers the
period in World History between the French Revolution and
the present day. It will include a discussion of such topics as the
Balance of Power in the Eighteenth Century, the French Revolution, the Napoleonic Era, the Industrial Revolution, the
Growth of Democracy in the Nineteenth Century, the Eastern
Question, Nationality as a Factor in the Nineteenth Century, the
Expansion of Europe, the Armed Peace (1870-1914), the
Awakening of the Far East (1868-1914), the World War, the
Russian Revolution, the League of Nations, Problems of the
Pacific.
Text-book: Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European 118 Faculty op Arts and Science
History, Houghton, Mifflin Co., revised edition, or Carleton
Hayes, Political and Social History of Modern Europe, Vol. II,
1815-1924. Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
2. Canadian History. — This course opens with a brief
analysis of the reasons for European colonization of America
and a sketch of the colonial effort of Spain, France and Great
Britain. In the French regime, exploration, the development of
government, the conflict of church and state, and the struggle
with Great Britain for the West are studied. In the British
period, the relations of the French and English and the evolution
of Canadian self-government are given special attention.
On the colonization of America and the history of New
France, students are especially advised to consult: Ramsay
Muir, Expansion of Europe; Abbott, Expansion of Europe; the
works of Francis Parkman; Munro, Crusaders of New France;
Fiske, New France and New England; Eastman, Church and
State in Early Canada; Lucas, History of Canada, Vol. I, New
France; Wrong, Conquest of New France.
On the British Period: Skelton, The Canadian Dominion,
Life and Letters of Sir Wilrfid Laurier; Keenleyside, Notes on
Canadian History; Egerton, History of Canada, Part II, 1763-
1921; Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada, Documents of the
Canadian Constitution, 1759-1915; Bracq, Evolution of French
Canada; Morison, British Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Trotter, Federation of Canada; Wallace, Sir John Macdonald; Dafoe, Laurier.
An essay counting 10% of the year's work must be submitted early in the autumn term.
Subject, The Causes of European Expansion; Religion in New
France and in New England; The Ethnic Origins of the Canadian people.
Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units.
3. English History. — The history of England from the
Norman Conquest to the Revolution of 1688. This course is
intended primarily for Second Year students who mean to History 119
specialize in history. It aims at interpreting the constitutional,
political, economic, and religious development of England and
Wales during the period prescribed. Attention will also be paid
to the history of Scotland and Ireland and the origin of Overseas
Britain. The sequel to this course is History 8.
Text-book: Muir, A Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. I.
A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's
work must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening of
the autumn term. Subject: The Chief Contributions of the
Normans to the Development of the English people, or Feudalism in England, or The Rise of the English Towns.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage.> 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
History 4, 5 and 6 are intended especially for Third Year
students, History 7 and 8 for Fourth Year. History 4 (or 5)
must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honour students (whether in History alone or in a
Combination Course) must take a History Seminar of one
hour a week in either their Third or their Fourth Year. The
Seminar is intended as training in intensive work and carries
no credits. If the Graduating Essay be written in History, it
will carry a value of 3 units.
4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History from
the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople, 325-1453
A.D. The following subjects will be treated: the triumph of
Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire;
the Barbarian Invasions; the earlier monastic movements;
Mohammed and Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks and
Charlemagne; the struggle between Empire and Papacy; the
Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the
later monastic movements; the rise of the universities;
Frederick II; the later Mediaeval Empire; the National Kingdoms in France, Spain, England and Scotland; the Turks and
the collapse of the Byzantine Empire. 120 Faculty op Arts and Science
Text-book: Thorndike, A History of Mediaeval Europe,
Houghton Mifflin.
Additional text-books for Honour students: Oman, The
Dark Ages. Tout, Empire and Papacy. Lodge, The Close of
the Middle Ages. Bryce, The Holy Roman Empire.
A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work, must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening
of the autumn term. Subject: The Causes of the Downfall of
the Western Roman Empire, or St. Benedict and Western
Monasticism, or The Rise of the Frankish Empire.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
5. Renaissance and Reformation.—Mediaeval civilization in
the time of Dante; the forerunners of the Renaissance; the
Renaissance in Italy (illustrated with slides); the Protestant
Reformation and the Catholic Reaction; in conclusion, a short
account of the subsequent history of religious thought down to
our own times.
An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Nature of the Universe and of Man in Mediaeval Thought,
or The Rise of the Critical Spirit 1200-1520 or The Beginning of National Literature.
Text-books: W. H. Hudson, The Story of the Renaissance.
Fisher, The Reformation. McGiffert, Martin Luther.
Additional reading, especially for Honour students: Sichel,
The Renaissance. Taylor, Some Aspects of the Renaissance.
Symonds, A Short History of the Renaissance in Italy. Symonds,
The Renaissance in Italy. Burckhardt, The Renaissance
in Italy, Andre Michel, Histoire de I'Art (III, IV). Christopher
Hare, Life and Letters in the Italian Renaissance. Preserved
Smith, Erasmus. Emerton, Erasmus. Allen, The Age of
Erasmus.
Three hours a week. Not given 1927-28. 3 units.
6. The Age of Louis XIV, the Pre-Revolution, the Revolution and Napoleon. Historv 121
The break-up of the medieval system, the evolution of
modern intellectual and material conditions, and the effect of
the revolutionary spirit.
An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Rise of the Middle Class Before 1643. Social Standards and
Customs in the Reign of Louis XIV.
Text-books: Lowell, The Eve of the French Revolution.
Shailer Matthews, The French Revolution. Johnston, Napoleon.
Additional reading required of Honour students: Taine,
L'ancien regime (abridged), Heath. Aulard, The French
Revolution. Lacour-Gayet, Napoleon, or Rose, Napoleon. Fisher,
Bonapartism. Tilley, Modern France. Abbott, Expansion of
Europe.
Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units.
7. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic
history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with
especial attention to international relations. Intended for Fourth
Year students.
An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject:
Geographic Factors in the European History of the 19th Century, or The Growth of Internationalism, 1815-1914.
Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815.
Additional reading required of Honour students: Gooch,
History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919. Fueter, World History,
1815-1920. Moon, Imperialism and World Politics.
Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History.
Lavisse et Rambaud, Histoire Generate. Moon, Syllabus of International Relations. Buell, International Relations. Tilley,
France. Mowat, A History of European Diplomacy, 1815-1914.
Rambaud, Histoire de la Civilization Francaise. Grant Robertson, Bismarck. Thayer, Cavour. Fairgrieve, Geography and
World Poiver. Marvin, Century of Hope and The Unity Series.
Gooch, Germany. Makeef, Russia. Huddleston, France. Toynbee, Turney. Toynbee, The Balkans.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 122 Faculty op Arts and Science
8. Great Britain Since 1688. The British Empire — This
course aims at an interpretation of the constitutional, political,
economic and religious development of the British Isles since
the Revolution of 1688. Attention will also be paid to the growth
of the British Empire during the eighteenth, nineteenth and
twentieth centuries. This course is the sequel to History 3.
Text-book: Muir, Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. II.
Additional reading required of Honour students: Grant
Robertson, England under the Hanoverians. Slater, The Making
of Modern England. Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century.
For reading and reference: Cambridge History of British
Foreign Policy. Poole and Hunt, The Political History of
England (Vols. VIII-XII). Cambridge Modern History (Vols.
V-XII). Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution. Egerton, A Short
History of British Colonial Policy. Basil Williams, Life of
Chatham. Morley, Life of Gladstone. Moneypenny and Buckle,
Life of Disraeli. Howard Robinson, The Development of the
British Empire.
A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's
Work, must be handed in early in the autumn. Subject: Sir
Robert' Walpole, or The Irish Question in the Eighteenth Century, or The Social Effects of the Industrial Revolution.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. ' 3 units.
9. History of the United States of America.—This course
begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak
of the Revolution and traces the history of the United States
from the commencement of the War of Independence to the
close of the World War.
Text-book: Muzzey, The United States of America, Ginn.
Additional reading required for Honour students: Dealey,
Foreign Policies of the United States, Ginn. Malin, Interpretations of Recent American History, Century.
An essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be
handed in early in the autumn. Subject: Washington and Ma r hematics 123
Jackson, A Comparison and Contrast, or The Growth of Nationalism in the United States, 1776-1826.
Mr. Soward. 3 units.
10. An Outline of the Social History of the Western
World.—The origin of man, pre-literary history, and a discussion
of those social developments which have contributed most to the
evolution of modern society in the western world. The course
will include such topics as inventions, forms of social groupings,
changing standards of conduct, the results of exploration, and
the development of modern industry and thought.
An introductory essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be handed in early in the fall term. Subject:
Egyptian Religion, Life Among the Cromagnons, Babylonian
Commerce. \ "
Text-books: Barnes, An Outline of the Social History of
the Western World. Breasted, Ancient Times. Abbott, The
Expansion of Europe.
Additional reading required of Honour students: Dickinson, The Greek View of Life. Boas, The Mind of Primitive Man.
Fowler, Rome. Cheney, Industrial and Social History of England. Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units.
Honour Seminar, 1927-28, to be chosen from (a) "The
Origins of the World War," Mr. Soward. (b) "Problems of
the Pacific," Mr. Sage, (c) "Historical Method," Mr. Keenleyside. (d) "The Writing of History," Mr. Soward. (e) "The
History of British Columbia," Mr. Sage.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Assistant Professor: L. Richardson.
Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley.
Assistant: Walter H. Gage.
Assistant: May L. Barclay.
Assistant: C. Islay Johnston.
Assistant: A. P. Mellish. 124 Faculty op Arts and Science
Courses 2, 3, and 4 are open to students who have completed
Course 1.
Pass Courses
1. (a) Algebra. — An elementary course, including ratio,
proportion, variation, interest and annuities, solutions of equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, and the binomial
theorem.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to
XV, Oxford.
Three hours a week. First Term.
(») Geometry. — An elementary course in synthetic and
analytical geometry as outlined for Senior Matriculation.
Text to be announced.
Two hours a week. Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry. — An elementary course involving the
use of logarithms.
Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn).
One hour a week, First Term, and two hours a week, Second
Term. 3 units.
2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight line
and circle, and a study of the other conies.
Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Buchanan.
(b) Algebra. — A continuation of the previous course in
algebra involving exponential, logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued fractions.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger
Edition), Oxford.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Nowlan and Mr.
Robinson.
(c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential and
integral calculus, with various applications.
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
One hour a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units. Mathematics 125
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course
deals with the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation
of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance.
Rietz, Crathorne and Rietz, Mathematics of Finance, Holt.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robinson. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is to
acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies and their
motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a
knowledge of elementary mathematics is essential. The subject-
matter treated includes: The shape and motions of the earth,
systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion,
gravitation, tides, time, the stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system.
Moulton, Introduction to Astronomy, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 2 units.
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection
with this course may register for Mathematics 18. They will
be required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with
various phases of Astronomy. 1 unit.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of
the subject.
- Text to be announced.
Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane
trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De Moivre's
theorem, expansions of sin nq, etc., hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical trigonometry will cover the solution
of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy. 126 Faculty op Arts and Science
Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II.
Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow.
Two hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 2 units.
12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course in
plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the principle
of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid geometry the principal properties of solid figures are studied, as well as the theory
of projection in space, with various applications to the conic
sections.
Dupuis, Elementary Synthetic Geometry, Macmillan.
Dupuis, Elements of Synthetic Solid Geometry, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
13. Analytical Geometry.—A general study of the conies
and systems of conies, and elementary work in three dimensions.
Loney, Co-ordinate Geometry.
Two hours a week. Mr. Jordan. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants. — A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Burnside and Panton, Theory of Equations, Vol. I, Dublin.
Weld, Theory of Determinants.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra. — Selected topics in higher algebra,
including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers, probability.
Hall and Knight, Hiqher Algebra, Macmillan. Chrystal,
Text-book of Algebra. Part II.
Two hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of
the previous course in calculus, treating partial differentiation, Mathematics 127
expansions of functions of many variables, singular points,
reduction formulae, successive integration, elliptic integrals, and
Fourier series.
Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various
applications to geometry, mechanics and physics.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
17. Applied Mathematics. — A course dealing with the
applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a
rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics.
Loney, Theoretical Mechanics.
Three hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 3 units.
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the
historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics. Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics. Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit.
Graduate Courses
20. Analytical Solid Geometry.—Snyder and Sisam, Analytical Geometry of Space.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable. — Goursat-
Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I.
22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—Pierpont,
Functions of a Complex Variable.
23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry.
24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective
Geometry, Vol. I.
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to
Celestial Mechanics.
26. Advanced Differential Equations. — Moulton, Periodic
Orbits.
27. Theory of Numbers.—Carmichael, Theory of Numbers. 128 Faculty op Arts and Science
28. Algebraic Numbers.—Reid, Elements of the Theory of
Algebraic Numbers.
29. Modern Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modern Algebraic Theories.
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: H. Ashton.
Associate Professor: A. F. B. Clark.
Assistant Professor: Isabel Maclnnes.
Assistant Professor: Henri Chodat.
Instructor: Janet T. Greig. .
Assistant: E. E. Delavault. I
Assistant: G. Barry.
Assistant: M. Portsmouth.
Assistant: W. Tipping.^
Assistant in German: J. Battle.
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course,
a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any course
in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not in lieu
of, 3(a) and 4(a). Students from other universities who have
already taken the work of 3(a) or 4(a), may be given special
permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other
courses.
French
1. (a) Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto. Berthon, Grammaire Frangaise. Clement and Macirone,
Void la France, Heath. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. 3 units.
1. (b) Prescribed texts as for 1(a).
Revision of the essentials of French grammar and syntax
applied to the correct writing of French. There will be an oral
examination based on the texts read. 3 units.
Note :—Students who choose French will be informed which
course 1(a) or 1(&) they must take. The decision will be made
after a consideration of the marks in French obtained at the Modern Languages 129
Matriculation examination. Students in 1(b) will normally take
not more than two years French, as they will not be sufficiently
prepared to profit by the Third and Fourth Year courses. If,
however, they make rapid progress in the First Year they may be
transferred to the higher course in the Second Year when they
have satisfied the examiners of their fitness for more advanced
work. Students who have not passed the Matriculation
examination in French (or its equivalent) are not allowed to
take either of the First Year courses in this subject.
1. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who
intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a
week; no credit, no examination.
Summer Reading:—See the announcement after the Fourth
Year courses.
2. (a) La Fontaine, One Hundred Fables, Ginn. Moliere,
Les Femmes Savantes, Didier. France, Le Livre de Mon Ami,
Oxford.
Conversation in French on the above. Written resumes.
Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition,
Pt. 1. 3 units.
There will be oral tests.
2. (b) Texts as above. 3 units.
2. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who
intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a
week; no credits, no examination.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, and on the
development of the literature. Careful reading and discussion
of the following texts: Racine, Athalie (Warren), Holt. Moliere,
Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe, Heath. Schinz and King,
Seventeenth Century French Readings, Holt.
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year
French. 3 units. 130 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, with special
emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of
romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought
and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and
discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire
(Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet),
Didier. Diderot, Extraits (Fallex), Delagrave. Beaumarchais,
Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan. 3 units.
3. (c) French Composition and translation from English
into French. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 2.
3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses.
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Musset, Quatre Comedies,
Oxford. Hugo, Hernani, Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac.
3 units.
4. (6) Literature and Society in the XVllth Century.—
Mme de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves (Cambridge); La
Bruyere, Les Caracteres (Cambridge) ; Mme de Sevigne, Lettres
(Manchester); Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules (Longman),
Les Femmes Savantes (Hatier), L'Avare (Hatier), Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Hatier). 3 units.
4. (c) Bibliography, Composition and Oral French.—Book
required: Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3.
3 units.
4. (d) Eighteenth Century Drama.—Lesage, Turcaret,
Cambridge; Marivaux, Le jeu de Vamour et du hasard, Hatier,
Paris (Les classiques pour tous); Regnard, Le joueur, Hatier,
Paris; Sedaine, Le Philosophe sans le savoir, Hachette, London.
3 units.
Notes—Courses 3 (a) (b) (c) and 4 (a) (b) (c) (d) call for
much work out of class. They should be chosen only by students
able and willing to work alone. Students intending to take 4(a)
or 4(b) should apply to the Head of the Department before the
end of the present academic year for instructions for summer
reading. Modern Languages 131
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for the years stated below the
student must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books
mentioned below.
Second Year:
1. Bernardin de St Pierre, Paul et Virginie.
2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet.
3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala.
2. Le Sage, Gil Bias.
3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires.
4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset,, Poesies Choisies.
Fourth Year:
1. Moliere, L'Avare.
2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.
3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes.
4. Racine, Andromaque.
5. Racine, Les Plaideurs.
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Musset, Un Caprice.
The above have all been chosen from the series Les Classiques
pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for vacation
reading. At the present rate of exchange they can be bought at
the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these
books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd moments
no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading.
German
A. Beginners' Course. Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath.
(b) Haertel, German Reader for Beginners. 3 units.
B. Beginners' Course (Scientific) Composition, Grammar,
Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger,
Heath, (b) Gore, German Science Reader, Heath. 3 units. 132 Faculty op Arts and Science
1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition
and conversation based on texts read. Von Wildenbruch, Das
edle Blut, Scribner. Moser, Der Bibliothekar, Ginn. Bruns,
Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units.
2. (a) Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Com/position.
Holt, Composition and conversation based on texts read.
Heine, Die Harzreise, Allyn & Bacon. Lessing, Minna von
BarnJielm, Heath. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
3 units.
2. (b) A general survey of German literature.
Prerequisite for German 3: Lectures in English and
open to students of other literatures.
One hour a week. No credit.
3. The Classical Period.
Texts: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath. Goethe, Fatist I,
Heath. Schiller, Die Tangfrau van Orleans, Holt.
Composition based on above texts and Whitney and Stroebe,
German Composition, Holt. 3 units.
4. (a) Nineteenth Century Drama. 3 units.
4. (b) Nineteenth Century Fiction. 3 units.
These courses, which include the reading of a number of
standard works, will be given alternately.
5. A reading course in the short story. 3 units.
Department of Philosophy
Professor: H. T. J. Coleman.
Associate Professor: James Henderson.
Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Benson Wyman.
1. (a) Elementary Psychology.
Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology,
Houghton Mifflin Co. Philosophy 133
References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental
Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Titchener, A Text-book
in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James, Psychology
(Briefer Course). Pillsbury, Essentials of Psychology.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(b) Elementary Logic.
Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic,
Blackwood (latest edition).
One hour a week. 1 unit.
(c) A fourth hour per week will be devoted to lectures
introductory to the main problems of Philosophy, and a special
study of Descartes' Discourse on Method and Berkeley's Treatise
Concerning the Principles of Human Knowledge. Attendance
at this hour is voluntary and no formal credit is given. Students
contemplating Honours are, however, advised to take this course.
2. Ethics.
Text-book: Everett, Moral Values, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic of
Morals.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Tholes to Plato
(inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy,
Charles Scribner's Sons, and Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part 1),
Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will
be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and PhUebus.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the
Present time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy,
Macmillan.
Works of Reference: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers,
and the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 134 Faculty op Arts and Science
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the
Critique of Pure Reason.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and
others.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
7. Introduction to Education. A course of lectures and
discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of
mind which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey,
Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore,
What is Education? Adams (ed.), The New Teaching. Holmes,
What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology. — A study of those particular phases
of mental life and development which are fundamental in social
organization and activity.
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen,
London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following : Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct. Cooley, Human
Nature and the Social Order. Wallas, Human Nature in Politics;
The Great Society. Ross, Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts
of the Herd in Peace and War. Bernard, Introduction to Social
Psychology.
Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units. Physics 135
Students will note that Courses 3 and 4, and Courses 5 and
6 are given in alternate years. This arrangement is designed to
meet the needs of students who desire to pursue the study of
philosophy beyond the elementary stage.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: D. F. Stedman.
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, and
electricity, both in the lecture-room and in the laboratory. The
course has two objects: (1) To give the minimum acquaintance
with physical science requisite for a liberal education to those
whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to
the courses in Chemistry, Engineering, and Advanced Physics.
Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical
and practical work.
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Pyle, Practical Physics.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. College Physics.—This course consists of a general course
in Physics suitable for those students who have taken the two
years of Physics given in the High School. It will cover mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and electricity,
in a fuller manner than would be possible in an introductory
course.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, a Text-book for Colleges.
Prerequisite: High School Physics.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of the
statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the laws
of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity, expansion, and calorimetry. 136 Faculty op Arts and Science
Text-book: Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and
Heat.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units
4. Electricity, Sound, and Light. — A study of the fundamentals of magnetism, electricity, sound, and light.
Text-book: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and Light.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
5. Dynamics of a Particle and of a Rigid Body.—A rigorous
mathematical study of this subject.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
6. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. — In this course,
.especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity
and Magnetism.
Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
7. Kinetic Theory of Gases and Introduction to Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures elucidating the fundamentals of
these subjects.
Books for reference: Poynting and Thomson, Heat. Boyn-
ton, Kinetic Theory of Gases. Preston, Heat, and Meyer,
■Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Prerequisites: Physics 3, and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
8. Theoretical and Experimental Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by laboratory work consisting of accurate
measurements in diffraction, dispersion, interference, and polarization.
Books for reference: Houstoun, Treatise on Light. Mann,
Advanced Optics. Wood, Physical Optics. Preston, Theory of
Light. Drude, Theory of Optics, and Edser, Light for Students. Zoology 137
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory,
and radioactivity.
Books for reference: Thomson, Conduction of Electricity
through Gases. Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their
Radiations. Millikan, Electron. Thomson, Positive Rays. Hughes,
Photo-electricity, and Kaye, X-Rays.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 4, and Differential and Integral
Calculus.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
10. Advanced Experimental Physics. — In this course the
candidate for Honours is expected to perform one or more
classical experiments and to do some special work.
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and bibliographies
will constitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours laboratory per week. 3 to 6 units.
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith.
Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell.
Note—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals.
Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.
Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan. (American Edition, 1916.)
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units. 138 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates. — A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of
Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 2 units.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
(Not given in 1927-28.)
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of
animal tissues. Methods in histology.
Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units.
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of
vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of em-
bryological sections.
Seven hours per week. First Term. 2 units.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of
animals and plants; means of combating them.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours per week. Second
Term. 2 units.
(Not given in 1927-28.)
8. Private Reading. — A course of reading on Biological
theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no class
instruction will be given. 2 units. THE CU
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train
Btudents in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound
knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural
forces and natural products for the benefit of man and the
advancement of civilization. Experience shows that such a
training is the best yet devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative, supervisory and technical
positions. ^ J
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or
industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development in the school of experience—, but young men with a special
capacity and training for attaining these goals, and thus for
helping to develop the industries of the province. Consequently
the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than
narrow and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the
British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in
his after life, but also better for later specialization, for it
furnishes a more solid foundation, a better background, a
broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary
if the specialist is to achieve the maximum results of which
he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an
additional year of graduate study. The preliminary year
required in Arts is intended to increase the student's general
knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough
interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue
some study of the humanities as a hobby or recreation.
The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent in
a general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic
sciences. This gives not only a broad training, but enables the
student to discover the work for which he has special liking or 142 Faculty op Applied Science
aptitude and to select more intelligently the subjects in which
to specialize during the two final years at college. During the
latter periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get
practice in applying scientific knowledge, in solving problems,
in doing things; and there is also training in Economics, Law
and Industrial Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is
required to engage in some industrial or professional work that
will afford practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory
or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic
study.
FACILITIES FOR WORK
For laboratory and other facilities see Pages 24-35.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University are
given on pages 38, 39. The following are special conditions
affecting admission to Applied Science:
1. Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation
or equivalent (as for Arts).
2. All other courses require:
(a) Junior Matriculation or equivalent.
(b) Also a First Year Arts course or equivalent,* which
shall include the following subjects: Chemistry 1;
Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry);
Physics 1, or 2; English 1; Latin 1, or French 1, or
German B.
The passing grade is fifty per cent, for Chemistry, Physics
and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass of
, forty per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of fifty
per cent, has been obtained in the total.
Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and,
if passed with a grade of at least fifty per cent., need not be
taken in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted
in lieu of Economics in Applied Science. A reading knowledge
of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering. Information for Students in Applied Science 143
3. No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental
in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics
or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplementals in other
subjects to the extent of more than three units*.
Students who have failed to complete the above requirements
may apply for permission to take the September supplemental
examinations in Arts.
"Students preparing for admission to Applied Science are recommended to take their First Year in Arts and Science rather than Senior
Matriculation, but if such students proceed by way of Senior Matriculation they must take Chemistry and Physics, and are required to make
50 per cent, in each of these two subjects and also in Algebra, Geometry
and Trigonometry.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc). (See below.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc). (See Page 170.)
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the
completion of the work in one of the courses! given below:
I. Chemical Engineering.
II. Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V. Forest Engineering.
VI. Geological Engineering.
VII. Mechanical Engineering.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering.
IX. Mining Engineering.
X. Nursing and Health.
*A unit normally consists of one lecture hour, or one continuous
laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours, per week
throughout the session; or two lecture hours or equivalent laboratory
periods throughout a single term.
+The curriculum described in the following pages may be changed
from time to time as deemed advisable by the Faculty. 144 Faculty of Applied Science
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science
is offered, leading to the degree of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See
Page 170.)
Note,:—A series of noon-hour talks is given during the
session by the Faculty and prominent outsiders on the subjects:
choice of a profession; occupations for which an Applied Science
course forms a suitable preparation; life and work in different
engineering professions and industries. The purpose of these
talks is to assist students to select the course best suited to their
tastes and aptitudes, and their probable life-work.
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important
that the work done at the University should be supplemented
by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore
students are expected to spend their summers in employment
that will give such experience. Before a degree will be granted,
a candidate is required to satisfy the Department concerned
that he has done at least four months' practical work related
to his chosen profession. Third and Fourth Year Essays (see
Page 146) should be based, as far as possible, upon the summer
work.
Students engaged in summer work requiring them to enter
the University after the specified date of admission will be
allowed to register without penalty, upon the approval of the
Dean, in case the work affords necessary experience in connection
with their academic courses, as in Geological survey parties; or
if statements are received from their employers that circumstances prevent an earlier release.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing,
Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but
not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean.
Students seeking exemption as above must make written
application to the Dean accompanied by certificates indicating
the character of the work done and the time devoted to it. Courses in Applied Science
145
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
The work of the First and Second Years' is the same in all
courses, except those in Nursing and Health.
First Year
Subject.
Math. 1 Trigonometry
Math. 2 Solid Geometry
Math. 3 Algebra
Math. 4 Calculus
CE. 1 Descriptive Geom. ..
M.E. 1 Drawing 1
Physics 1 Mechanics
Physics 2 Heat
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis ...
M.E. 2a Shop Practice
Biology 1* Introductory....
C.E. 2 Surveying
CE. 30 Engineering Prob. 1
201
201
201
201
180
202
218
218
178
202
174
181
190
First Term.
ill
Second Term.
KM
gs
■3 s
ge S
3«
Field Work
I 4 1..
3
6
3
3
2
2
•Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 60 per cent, will be
accepted in lieu of this course.
Second Year
Subject.
« 8f
a s-
8 8
fa »
Math. 6 Calculus
Math. 7 Anal. Geom
•Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis
C.E. 4 Graphics
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory
Physics 3 Electricity
Physics 4 Mechanics
CE. 5 Mapping
CE. 6 Surveying
Geology 1 General
tCE. 7 Surveying
CE. 81 Engineering Prob. 2.
201
202
178
181
204
219
219
182
182
196
182
190
First Term.
III
Second Term.
Field Work
13 1..
IK
in
fStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining
Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 182)
immediately after the spring examinations.
•Students entering the Second Year of Applied Science who have not
previously taken Chemistry 2 (a) will be required to take Chemistry
2 (a) and 2 (b) during the Second Year; such students will be exempted
from taking Civil Engineering 31. 146 Faculty op Applied Science
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Third and
Fourth Years, and must conform to the following:—
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects
of the work on which the student was engaged during the
summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which
he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage
may be taken of any source of information, but due
acknowledgment must be made of all authorities consulted.
It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches,
photographs or specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of substantial quality, standard letter size (8V2XII inches), on
one side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top
and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine
sample reports to be found in the library or in the departments.
4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the
Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students
may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for
the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or
the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations.
A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on
presentation, English and matter. In third year essays
presentation, that is, the manner in which the material is
arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight,
with English second and matter third. In fourth year essays
most emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still
rated highly. Courses in Applied Science
147
COURSES
I. Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical
manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with
the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to
design and to oversee the construction of new buildings and
to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be
more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and
alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic
and inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper industry, and
the utilization of the waste from a number of industrial plants
indigenous to the Province. Accordingly, the course of study
includes a number of courses in the older branches of engineering
along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by the
time at the disposal of the student.
Third Year
Subject.
2 **
ft *>
0 *
First Term.
■S 5*
Second Term.
at t.
£53
§88
3a
Essay
Economics 1 Introductory
Met. 1 Introductory
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy ,.
Chem. 3 Organic
Chem. 4 Theoretical
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis ..
E.E. 1 General
Physics 5 Light
CE. 12 Hydraulics
146
191
215
197
178
179
179
207
219
184 148
Faculty op Applied Science
Fourth Year
Subject.
First Term.
a e £
Second Term.
it
I*
Essay
Chem. 6 Industrial ...
Chem. 7 Physical
Chem. 8 Electro
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic
Chem. 16 Engineering
Met. 2 General
Thesis
146
179
179
180
180
180
216
12
3
3
ii
II. Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice
of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be prepared to
assist in the solution of problems of value to the industrial
and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged
to give in the first two years a knowledge of the fundamental
principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient mathematics
to enable the theoretical parts of the subject to be understood.
In the Third Year, Analytical, Organic, and Physical
Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to
technology; while in the Fourth Year a considerable amount of
time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Courses in Applied Science
149
Third Year
Subject.
First Term.
It
III
Second Term.
It
Essay
Econ. 1 Introductory .
Chem. 3 Organic
Chem. 4 Theoretical ..
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis
MeL 1 Introductory ..
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy
Met. 5 Assaying
German (Arts) B ....
Physics 5 Light
146
191
178
179
179
215
197
216
131
219
3
3
9
Fourth Year
Subject.
££
First Term.
1*
£ « ¥
Second Term.
** ^M
get
i§*
Essay
Bacteriology 1 (Arts)
Physics 9 Advanced ..
Chem. 6 Industrial ...
Chem. 7 Physical
Chem. 8 Electro-
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic
Met. 2 General
Thesis
146
83
219
179
179
180
180
216
3
3
is
III. Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an
adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil 150 Faculty op Applied Science
Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated
with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health,
comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth.
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems in.water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and
industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation
and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and
protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways,
electric and steam railways; and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial
enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide,
in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth
along those lines which the student's interests and environment
determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training
in pure and applied science, in the humanities, in economics and
business engineering, and in the technical phases of professional
work establishes a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere
spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity
for reliable work and judgment which makes safe the assumption
of responsibilities.
The methods of instruction are planned with the view of
bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while
training them in habits of accurate analysis and careful work.
Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will
give them an insight into the various phases of the career upon
which they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the
foundation for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise
language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering
activities. In the Fourth Year thesis an opportunity is given
for special investigation and research under the supervision of
experienced engineers. Courses in Applied Science
151
Third Year
Subject.
o *
O 4*
fa M
First Term.
9 v
ge.8
3«
Second Term.
I*
fa *
5^
§*
Essay
C.E. 8 Foundations
CE. 9 Elementary Design
CE. 10 Strength of Mtls..
CE.-11 Railways
C.E. 12 Hydraulics
CE. 13 Mapping
C.E. 14 Surveying
CE. 15 Drawing
M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory
E.E. 1 General
Econ. 1* Introductory
CE. 16 Surveying
CE. 21 Water Power
CE. 28 Seminar
146
182
183
183
184
184
184
184
185
205
207
191
185
186
189
Field Work
*Economics 1 in Arts will be accepted in lieu of the Science Course.
Fourth Year
Subject.
3 ■■
Sfi
First Term.
Second Term.
H
5&J
JS
u
rt M oj
f- 2 a>
Essay
CE. 17
C.E. 18
CE. 19
C.E. 20
C.E. 22
CE. 23
CE. 24
CE.
C.E,
C.E
CE.
CE.
25
27
Structural Design .
Engineering Economics
Law—Contracts ....
Geodesy
Municipal
Transportation
Mechanics of Mtls. .
Theory of Structures .
Trips
Thesis
Seminar
Hydraulic Machines ..
146
185
185
186
186
187
188
188
189
189
189
189
190
3
6
Required
2
1
Sat. A
M. 152
Faculty op Applied Science
IV. Electrical Engineering
This' course is designed for those students who desire a
general training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering in addition to the basic principles of Mechanical
Engineering. The Third Year of the course is devoted mainly
to Mechanical Engineering, together with work which involves
the broad principles which underlie all engineering work. The
Fourth Year is devoted to Electrical Engineering, the fundamental principles of industrial economics, works organization,
management, and financing.
Vancouver and the surrounding country afford excellent
facilities for the study of engineering works under commercial
conditions. The managing officials of these works are pleased to
permit students, in charge of a member of the Faculty, to inspect
and conduct tests at pre-arranged times. Organized visits to
industrial plants constitute a regular part of the advanced work.
Third Year
Subject.
fa to
Pint Term.
I*-
■si*
Second Term.
I*
3 I
■§6*
Essay
M.E. 3 Kinematics
M.E. 4 Dynamics
M.E. 5 Design
M.E. 7 Thermo-dynamics
CE. 10 Str. of Materials
E.E. 2 General
CE. 12 Hydraulics
M.E. 2b Shop Practice
Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or
Math. 9 (Differential Equa.)
146
203
204
204
205
183
208
184
203
202
3
3
3
4
3
4
3
3
3
4
3
8 Courses m Applied Science
153
Fourth Year
Subject.
3 5
First Term.
3*
I
in
Second Term.
I*
It
Essay
E.E. 4 Machines
E.E. 5 Traction
E.E. 6 Transmission
E.E. 7 Design
E.E. 8 Radio
M.E. 8 Thermo-dynamics
M.E. 10 Design
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design ...
Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or
Math. 9 (Differential Equa.)
CE. 18 Engr. Economics
CE. 19 Engr. Law
C.E. 29 Hydr. Machines
146
211
212
212
213
213
205
206
207
202
185
186
190
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
V. Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging
and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, now lead all
others, and are rapidly expanding. They must always play a
very important part in the economy of the Province, because
seven-eighths of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that
will grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because
over half the remaining stand of saw-timber — the last big
reserve — of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and
especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the
forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these
vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the
part of the government forest services.
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open
to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is
designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber
industry, and a major part of the time — apart from the preliminary foundation work — is devoted to the branches of 154
Faculty op Applied Science
engineering most used in it. In addition, the fundamental
subjects of forestry are covered. As in other engineering courses
the students are expected to obtain practical experience during
the summer vacations, this being an essential supplement to the
studies at the University.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants,
and plants for seasoning and preserving wood — more, in fact,
than any other place in the Province. Pulp mills, logging
operations and extensive forests are within easy reach. The
advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special
feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of
Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry Branch. A description of
this Laboratory and its activities is given in another part of this
calendar. It affords opportunities for instruction in testing the
mechanical properties of timber and other structural materials,
and facilities are now provided for experimental and demonstration work in wood seasoning and preserving.
Third Year
2 ■■
•a a,
o &
S. o°
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
MM
IS*
•a c
•J §,
Z°-M
ft
M a
bS
■§s*
146
191
192
192
192
174
176
207
182
182
183
183
184
184
184
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
4
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
i
F.E. 1 General Forestry
F.E. 2 Mensuration
4
F.E. 3 Protection
F.E. 4 Finance
CE. 8 Foundations
2
2
2
C.E. 10 Strength Materials ...
C.E. 11 Railways
3
3
3
CE. 13 Mapping
C.E. 14 Surveying
CE. 12 Hydraulics
3 Courses in Applied Science
155
Fourth Year
Subject.
Essay
F.E. 5 Technology .
F.E. 6 Organization
F.E. 7 History
F.E. 8 Silviculture .
F.E. 9 Lumbering .
F.E. 10 Logging ...
F.E. 11 Milling
F.E. 12 Products ..
Bot. 6 (b) Pathology )
Zool. 7 Entomology \
Bot. 7 (a) Ecology
CE. 17 Structural Design
C.E. 18 Economics
C.E. 19 Law
M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab. ...
5*
146
192
193
193
193
194
194
194
195
177
224
177
185
185
186
205
First Term.
J J
Second Term.
U 0)
3
3
2
1
1
2
1
3a.
■is*
VI. Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students
who intend to enter Geology as a profession.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in
the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics,
which are extensively applied in the solution of geological
problems. The engineering subjects are useful not only to the
Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor,
but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch
of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist,
Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is
useful for those who will be in any way connected with the
discovery or development of the natural resources of the country.
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory
and field during the session, the student is expected to obtain
practical experience during the summer vacations. 156
Faculty op Applied Science
Third Year
Subject.
Q*
First Term.
Ste
lis
Second Term.
It
111
Essay
Geol. 2 Mineralogy ...
Geol. 3 Historical
GeoL 4 Structural
Geol. 5 Regional
Chem. 4 Theoretical ..
Econ. 1 (Arts)
Min. 1 Metal Mining ..
Met. 5 Fire Assaying .
Met. 1 General
Ore Dressing 1 General
ZooL 1
CE. 13 Mapping
Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis
Met. 6* Wet Assaying .
146
197
198
198
199
179
191
214
216
215
217
224
184
179
217
'Either Chem. 5 or Met 6 must be taken.
Fourth Year
Subject.
ft*
First Term.
Second Term.
5*
I*
a*
ft
Essay
GeoL 6 Palaeontology
Geol. 7 Petrology
GeoL 8 Economic
CE. 18 Engr. Economics .
Geol. 9 Mineralography ..
GeoL 10 Field
Min. 2 Coal and Placer ...
Min. 3 Metal Mining
Min. 5 Surveying
Met. 2 Smelting
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory
Thesis ".
146
199
199
200
185
200
200
214
214
215
216
217
2
4
1
2
3
9
2
3
2
9
4
1
9
3 Courses in Applied Science
157
VII. Mechanical Engineering
As this branch of Engineering forms an outstanding feature
in all industrial development, the course of training is general
and basic in its character. Because of its general character it is
not possible in the time available to give the student an intimate
knowledge of the details of practice in any special line of work.
The course is designed more particularly for those who are likely
to take up the manufacture of machinery, power plant work (in-
eluding design and construction of steam, gas, oil, or hydraulic
plants), heating and ventilation of buildings, refrigeration, or
industrial management.
Students in this course are given a systematic course in the
fundamentals of Electrical Engineering.
Governed by the fact that values and costs are controlling
factors in the practice of Engineering, the subjects of the final
years are treated with a view of developing a business sense,
an understanding of men, and the ability to report clearly on
industrial problems. This demands the study of Economics, the
use of good English, and the participation in outside industrial
work during the vacation.
Third Year
As in Electrical Engineering. (See Page 152.)
Fourth Year
Subject.
Essay
M.E. 9 Thermodynamics
M.E. 10 Design
M.E. 11 Heating
M.E. 12 Plant Design
M.E. 13 Metals
E.E. 3 Standard Practice
CE. 18 Engr. Economics
CE. 19 Engr. Law
CE. 29 Hydraulic Mach
Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or
Math. 9 (Differential Equa.)
a«
146
205
206
206
206
206
209
185
186
190
202
First Term.
It-
Ill
Second Term.
in
3a 158 Faculty op Applied Science
VIII.-IX. Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding
field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design and operate a
great variety of plants and processes. He must be able to deal
with furnace and solution processes, based on chemical principles,
and mechanical crushing and separating processes, based on
physical principles, together with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in
the separation and refining of ores, artificial mineral products
and metals. The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly
commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the
practical economic considerations of costs and profits. Rapid
and continuous change and improvement is the rule. Methods
and machines quickly become obsolete. The field for research
and improvement in methods and machinery is ever widening,
though the economic margin is ever narrowing.
The Metallurgical course, in the Third and Fourth Years,,
based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed to give the
student a broad general knowledge of standard metallurgical
methods and machinery, with a fundamental grasp of the actual
applications of the basic sciences in practical metallurgical
operations, also sufficient laboratory practice to illustrate and
fix these in his mind and train him for an actual junior position
after graduation.
Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its
breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming more
difficult, and the development, steadily becoming more scientific,
of new mineral deposits are based largely on a knowledge of
the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and
chemical, but, immediately, chiefly geological in kind. On
the other hand, the operations of actual mining are largely
mechanical in kind, and call for use and knowledge of mechanical
and electrical equipment, adapted to underground methods and
conditions.
The conditions under which mining operations are carried
on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of the factors
to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure or indefinite Courses in Applied Science 159
* oftener than measureable. The qualities of good judgment and
decision are therefore of great importance in the application
of technical knowledge to mining. As in metallurgy, economic
considerations are paramount.
The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope. In
addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental
subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering,
Economics and Economic Geology.
The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles
and practice on which the discovery, development and economic
operation of mines are based, the practical application of
technical knowledge to actual operations, and the use of judgment and decision, by precept, example and illustration. Sufficient practical training and laboratory work is included to fit
the student for an actual junior position after graduation.
"While not given as separate subjects, the social, administrative
and ethical sides of the professions of Mining and Metallurgy
are included in the general treatment of appropriate subjects.
In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on British
Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products, namely:
Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke.
The University is conveniently located in proximity to coal
and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining operations being carried on within a few hours' journey, in connection
with which there are large washing and ore concentration plants.
There is a large metallurgical plant at Tacoma, within an easy
day's journey. Students have little difficulty in obtaining
positions in mines or smelters during their vacation, as several
of the larger companies have established the practice of accepting
student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation
months.
Students are recommended to spend their vacations at
practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining, and
are required to do so between the Third and Fourth Years as
an essential part of their course, without which a degree will
not be granted. An essay covering this work is also required,
as specified in the Fourth Year curriculum. 160
Faculty op Applied Science
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering
Third Year
Subject.
la
First Term.
o a
3a
Second Term.
31
*2 2 *
,3 m
Essay
Econ. 1
CE. 9 Elem. Design ...
CE. 10 Str. of Materials
C.E. 12 Hydraulics
C.E. 13 Mapping
M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory .
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
E.E. 1 General
Min. 1 Metal Mining ...
Ore Dressing 1 General .
Met. 1 General
Met. 5 Fire Assay
Met. 6 Wet Assay
146
191
183
183
184
184
205
197
207
214
217
215
216
217
Fourth Year
3 •■
•3 a
3 M
First Term.
Secpnd Term.
Subject.
mM
H
■§a-J
<u a;
" a
fa «)
3a
GeoL 9 Mineralography ....
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics ...
146
200
200
185
180
217
214
216
216
216
3
2
3
'a
2
2
2
1
3
9
6
*3
2
"s
2
2
2
1
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory .
Met. 4 Analysis
9
ie Courses in Applied Science
161
IX. Mining Engineering
Third Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering. (See Page 160.)
Fourth Year
35
First Term.
Secoiu
Term.
Subject.
lis
« u
IgS
3a
28
1*
■SI
£8
38
146
199
200
185
186
216
217
214
214
215
215
215
215
2
3
2
, 1 1
2
*2
2
2
1
4
1
9
3
2
3
2
1
2
'9
2
2
i
GeoL 7 Petrology
4
Geol. 8 Economic
1
CE. 18 Engr. Economics
C.E. 19 Engr. Law
Met 2 Smelting
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory ...
Min. 2 Coal and Placer
Min. 3 Metal Mining
9
Min. 4 Machinery
Min. 5 Surveying
Min. 7 Methods
Min. 6 Design
3
Short Courses in Mining
The regular Short Courses in Mining for the Session of
1926-27 will commence the second Monday in January, 1927,
and will continue for eight weeks. These courses include Mining,
Smelting, Ore Concentration, Geology and Ore-deposits, Mineralogy and Rock Study, Fire Assaying, Chemistry, and Surveying.
The courses are thoroughly practical in nature. They are
not primarily intended for those who have had a technical
training, but rather for those who have had practical experience
in mining and prospecting, or are connected with the business of
mining in any way. The courses are designed to give practical
and technical knowledge, helpful in practical mining work and
mining business. While they are short they are complete in themselves, and require no other preparation than a common-school
education or ability to read and write. 162 Faculty op Applied Science
Experience has shown that they fill a real need, and they
have proved very successful in the past.
As they do not form part of the regular University course,
a special bulletin is issued, in which details of the courses and
requirements for admission are given. Copies of this may be
obtained on application to the Registrar of the University.
These courses will not be given unless at least ten students
register for them.
X Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See
below.)
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Public Health Nursing. (See Page 166.)
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See Page 167.)
Registration for these courses will be subject to the general
University Regulations. (See Pages 40 and 41) and to the
special requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and
subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the
Faculty may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course)
This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree of
B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the diploma in nursing. It is given
by the University in co-operation with the Associated Hospital
Schools of Nursing, which means those that have signified their
willingness to supply the professional part of the course, and
have received the approval of the University Senate for that
purpose. Up to the present time the Vancouver General is the
only Hospital which has entered into association with the University to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the Courses in Applied Science
163
Department, are personally fitted for the profession of nursing. In addition they must be able to satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing.
The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a
broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools of
Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for those
who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in
Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing service.
The First and Second Years, which are academic, give the
students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a
foundation in the sciences underlying the practice of nursing.
Between the First and Second years a probationary period of
four months will be spent in an associated Hospital School of
Nursing. The Third and Fourth Years are devoted to professional training in an Associated Hospital, and are planned to
afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and to
develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the
efficient practice of nursing. The Fifth Year affords two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the
second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing
(Nursing C).
First Year (Academic)
Subject.
o^-
First Term.
3a
Second Term.
"■8
si!
3a
English 1 (a)
English 1 (b)
Choice of Mathematics 1
or Latin 1
or French 1
or History 1, 2, or 3
Physics 1
Chemistry 1
Biology 1
Nursing 1
105
106
124
95
128
117
218
178
174
220 164
Faculty op Applied Science
Probationary Period (Hospital)
The probationary period of four months, to be taken between
the first and second academic years, will be spent in an Associated
Hospital. In order to meet the admission requirements of the
Associated Hospital School of Nursing, the student must have
attained such age as may be fixed by the Associated Hospital
School of Nursing before entering upon this probationary
period; in the Vancouver General Hospital School of Nursing
the eighteenth birthday must be passed.
During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for
the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School of
Nursing information upon which to judge the students' qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student
to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing
reserve the right to reject candidates who do not reach the
required standards. %
Second Year (Academic)
Subject.
3 ••
*§ Si
English 2 (a)
English 2(b)
Zoology 1
Philosophy 1
Economics 1
Bacteriology 1
Bacteriology 2
Nursing 2
Anatomy and Physiology
106
106
224
132
97
221
221
221
220
First Term.
C* rjQ w
lis
Second Term.
at u
3a
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical
training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students Courses in Applied Science 165
in these years are required to register with the University even
though during this portion of the course they are in residence
at the Hospital. During these professional years students are
subject to the authority and are under the direction of the
officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The
required professional period is twenty-eight months, in which
is included the probationary period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities
may designate are accorded, and a yearly vacation of three
weeks is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the
School of Nursing.
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by
members of the medical staff of the associated Hospital and by
qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing;
Practical Nursing Procedure; Elementary Nutrition and
Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical
Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting); Gynecological
Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding;
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing in
Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing
experience in the following departments:
Medical. Operating Room.
Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat.
Gynecological. Obstetrical.
Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious.
Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis.
Infants. Diet Kitchen.
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students.
Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from
the students desirous of receiving this course. 166
Faculty op Applied Science
Fifth Year (Academic and Professional)
The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing
C, at the option of the student. The selection between these
courses need not be made until registering with the University for
the Fifth Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University, and appropriate field work under the supervision
of the various associated Public Health organizations.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Subject
Preventable Diseases
Epidemiology
Tuberculosis
Venereal Diseases
Mental Hygiene
Bacteriology
Infant Welfare
Orthopedics
Public Health
Public Health Administration
Public Health Organiations
Vital Statistics .;
Principles and Practice of Public
Health Nursing
Rural Public Health Nursing
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme ..
Methods in Health Teaching
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems
School Hygiene
Hospital Social Service
Metabolism and Nutrition
Psychology for Nurses
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure
Sociology
Geography 10
Motor Mechanics
Field Work
For Detail*
Total Hours
Total Hours
See Page:
Lectures
Laboratory
221
21
221
21
221
11
221
3
221
11
221
10
221
11
221
5
222
15
222
4
222
4
222
18
21
222
222
6
222
2
222
11
223
11
223
12
223
3
223
11
223
21
223
21
223
13
224
21
224
21
224
10
To run c
oncurrently
167
with the
work.
academic Courses in Applied Science
167
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for
the observation of Training School administration and ward
supervision in associated Hospitals.
Nursing C
Subject
Preventable Diseases
Mental Hygiene
Bacteriology
Infant Welfare
Orthopedics
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems
Teaching in Schools of Nursing
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of Nursing
Metabolism and Nutrition
Psychology for Nurses
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure
Sociology
Geography 10
Electives from Nursing B or from
related Science Courses
Field Work
See Page:
For Detail*
221
221
221
221
221
223
223
223
223
223
223
223
224
224
167
Total Uouns
Lectures
21
11
16
11
21
21
21
10
21
21
13
21
21
Total Hours
Laboratory
10
To run concurrently
with the academic
work.
Field Work in Nursing B and C
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field work,
or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Miss J. E. Johnston, Director. 168 Faculty op Applied Science
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young,
Provincial Health Officer; Mrs. C. A. Lucas, Saanich Memorial
Health Centre; Miss I. Jeffares, Cowichan Health Centre.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Mrs. E. Calhoun, District
Superintendent.
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.—
Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director, School
Hygiene.
The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.—
Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director.
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.—
Dr. F. T. Underhill, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders,
Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart
Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L.
Crease, Medical Superintendent.
FOR NURSING C
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. F. C. Bell, Superintendent; Miss K. "W. Ellis, Superintendent of Nurses.
The academic work and field work will run concurrently
throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the
last four weeks of the Second Term which, in Nursing B, will be
devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the
Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in
Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the
Associated Hospitals. Rural field work for some students may
have to be delayed until after the close of the University year,
depending upon the size of the class.
During the period spent in the Hospital, all students will
be subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers
of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing.
Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for Courses in Applied Science 169
practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields
of Public Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing.
Admission to Nursing B and C
The courses are open to students of the five-year course,
and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized Schools
of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in British Columbia
and who are personally fitted for their proposed work. For
Nursing C it is also required that applicants shall fulfil the
University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation.
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B or C
should be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not
later than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good
health and physical condition, signed by a regular practising
physician, must be presented with the applications.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one
month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public
health or social agency approved by the Department. "While not
obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field
Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver
General Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian
Order of Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this
month in so far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made
at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and
Health that arrangements may be made with the Field Agencies.
Nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and will
receive no remuneration during this period.
Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are
also advised to secure this month's experience with one of the
Public Health organizations if possible.
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in
nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable to take 170 Faculty op Applied Science
a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a
part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses
registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as the
regular-course students.
DOUBLE COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF B.A.
AND B.A.SC
The requirements for the first and second years are as set
forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arts
(Pages 65-67) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2, Mathematics 2 (c) (calculus) and
Chemistry 1 must be taken. The passing grade for each
of these subjects is fifty per cent. (See also, admission
to Applied Science, Page 142.)
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Mathematics 2 (a) and 2 (b),
and Physics 3 or 4 may not be taken. These subjects
are covered later in Applied Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those
intending to enter Geological engineering, French also).
The third, four, fifth and sixth years of the double course
correspond to the first, second, third and fourth years of Applied
Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing the
fifth year of this course.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science
must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its
equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a
student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00 Courses in Applied Science 171
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a.) To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned) :
(i.) To do two or more years of private work
under the supervision of the University,
such work to be equivalent to one year of
graduate study; or
(ii.) To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term of
resident graduate study, the total of such
work to be equivalent to one year of
resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis
must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject.
(Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. See
special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters'
Theses").
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work,
must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the
Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean.
5. First or Second Class standing in History and Principles
of Education and Educational Psychology of the Teacher Training Course will be accepted as equivalent to a Minor for the
M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head
of the Department in which the student wishes to Major.
6. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required,
and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in the major
subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor.
7. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 15th. For fees see Page 44. 172 Faculty op Applied Science
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April.
December examinations will be held in all subjects of the First
and Second Years, and are obligatory for all students of these
years. December examinations in subjects of the Third and
Fourth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed before
Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments concerned.
Applications for special consideration on account of illness or
domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than
two days after the close of the examination period. In cases
where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented.
2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least 50 per
cent, in each subject. The grades .are as follows: First Class,
an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per
cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First and Second
Years of the course in Nursing and Health the requirements for
passing are the same as those for the First and Second Years
in Arts, namely, 50 per cent, of the examination as a whole, and
not less than 40 per cent, in each subject.
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations
of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him
supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which
he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such
examinations have been granted.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September
20th, 21st, 22nd and 23rd, and will not be granted at any other
time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees Page 44), must be
in the hands of the Registrar at last two weeks before the date set
for the examinations.
6. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental
examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 4 units Examinations and Advancement 173
of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examination
outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year unless
special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the
failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations
had an adequate cause. Students in Nursing A must remove
all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering
their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he
has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all pre-requisite
subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it,
both must be taken in the same session.
8. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects
of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat
his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by the
Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations in
subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class
standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects
of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year.
9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
10. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or
Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are
outstanding.
11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English. 174 Faculty op Applied Science
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the
year as the Faculty may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Assistant Professor: John Davidson.
Assistant Professor: Frank Dickson.
Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: Braham G. Griffith.
Assistant: C. W. Argue.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely
related to Biological Science, such an Agriculture, Forestry,
Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelation-
ships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger,
1924.
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week. ^^
2. Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics
illustrated by the race-histories of certain plants and animals;
the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired
characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Two lectures per week. First Term.
3. General Physiology of animal and plant life processes.
Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite
Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be
consulted.
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans-Green. Botany 175
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany,
except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course
(2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Morphology.
General Morphology of plants. A comparative study of
plant structures. The relationships of plant groups. Comparative
life histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms,
involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per
week. First Term.
3. Plant Physiology.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Palladin, Plant Physiology, English Edition
(Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, P. Blakiston.
Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per
week. First Term.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus. 176 Faculty op Applied Science
Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine
and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and
poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson,
University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants
and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
term.
5. (6) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, "Washington,
D. C.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work per week.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field herbarium and laboratory work.
Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature.
Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Text-books: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany,
Wiley & Sons, N.Y. Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto. Chemistry 177
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term.
6. (a) General Plant Pathology. — Identification and life-
histories of parasites causing plant-diseases; means of combating
them.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week during one-half of one term.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relations
of forests and their environment; the biological characteristics of
important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions;
physiography. 1 *
Text-book: Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford
University Press.
One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and
laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours,
one period per week.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: E. H. Archibald.
Professor of Organic Chemistry: R. H. Clark.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Assistant Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Instructor: John Allardyce.
Lecturer: M. Neal Carter.
Assistant: R. W. Ball.
Assistant: D. F. Stedman.
Assistant: A. F. Gallaugher.
Assistant: R. H. Ball. 178 Faculty op Applied Science
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Horace Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribner's.
Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks of
the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part
of the laboratory work.
Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Talbot, Quantitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a),
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of
the compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic
Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week. Chemistry 179
4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the
development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena,
the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule.
Text-book: James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis. — The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. First Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry. — Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures
will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments
in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week.
7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases,
thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the 180 Faculty op Applied Science
dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the
physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their
chemical constitutions.
Text-book: Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements,
Longmans-Green.
Reference books: Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical
Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
8. Electro-Chemistry—As in Arts. (See Page 91.)
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See
Page 92.)
16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators;
chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and
practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box
filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of counter
current extraction.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of
Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation.
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week during second term of Fourth Year.
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor: Wm. E. Duckering.
Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson.
Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin.
Special Lecturer: J. R. Grant.
Instructor: A. Lighthall.
Instructor: A. G. Stuart.
Assistant: Carl F. Barton.
1. Descriptive Geometry. — Geometrical drawing; orthographic, isometric and axometric projections. Civil Engineering 181
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition,
Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Barton, Mr. Stuart.
2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit
and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys.
Levels for profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring
examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for
twenty days, or equivalent.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Barton.
3. Materials of Engineering*—Manufacture and properties
of iron and steel; principal alloys; considerations governing
selection of materials; manufacture and properties of cements;
concrete; stone and brick masonry; principal kinds of commercial timber; treating and preservation of timber; discussion
of standard specifications for engineering work.
Text-book: Moore, Materials of Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
References: Mills, Materials of Engineering; Johnson,
Materials of Construction, Wiley; Upton, Materials of Engineering, Wiley. ^
One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson.
4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures;
composition of forces; general methods involving the force and
equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions,
centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed
structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses.
Algebraic check methods will be used throughout.
Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic
Statics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 4 must either precede or accompany
Civil 4.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
•Elective 182 Faculty op Applied Science
5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2.
Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and
topographical maps in convention or color. Mine and land plans.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
6. Surveying 1. — Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use. of the transit, level, compass,
stadia, minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph;
leveling; topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves;
vertical curves; transition curves.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying,
Vol. I, Wiley.
References: Gillespie, Surveying, Vol. I, Appleton and Co.;
Nugent, Plane Surveying, Wiley; Baker, Engineer's Surveying
Instruments, Wiley; Allen, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-
Hill ; Sullivan, Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Stuart.
7. Field Work 2:—(a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance,
preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography,
cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and
vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work
for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs.
(6) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of
river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and
sextants; the three-point problem; stream-gauging by surface
and deep floats and by the current meter.
(c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth;
adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and
minor instruments; mine surveying.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
Time, same as for Civil 2.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall.
8. Foundations and Masonry.—Borings; bearing power of
soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open Civil Engineering 183
dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; estimates of quantities and costs.
Prerequisite: Civil 4.
Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and one three-hour period, First Term; one
lecture, Second Term.
9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities
and costs; preparation of plans.
Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary
Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co.
Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10.
One lecture and one three-hour period. Second Term.
Mr. Matheson.
10. Strength of Materials.—A thorough introduction to the
fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials;
stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience; the application of
the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear,
moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any
loading; riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses;
longitudinal shear; reinforced concrete; special beams.
The laboratory period includes the testing of cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the strength and
elasticity of these materials.
About one-half of the time will be set aside for the solution
of problems in investigation and design.
Text-book: Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials,
Wiley."
Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 4 and Civil 4.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall.
Note:—The laboratory testing is given in the Forest 184 Faculty op Applied Science
Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent
McElhanney and Mr. Lighthall.
11. Transportation 1. Railways.—The inception of railway
projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon
operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher grades;
adjustment, of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines.
Prequisite: Civil 6 and 7.
Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location, Wiley.
Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork,
McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of
Railways, Wiley.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin.
12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.— (a) Hydrostatics; design of
standpipes, reservoirs and dams. r
(b) Hydrodynamics; fundamental principles and their
application to problems on the discharge of orifices, notches and
weirs; flow in pipes and open channels; practical field and
laboratory measurements; examination of hydraulic developments. '^
Prerequisite: Physics 4.
Text-book: Russell, Hydraulics, Third Edition, Holt.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin.
13. Mapping 2. — Draughting from notes obtained in
Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys; map projections; topographic maps from photographic plates.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
14. Surveying 2.—A continuation of Civil 6. Theory and
use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise instruments;
plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo-
topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys;
field astronomy.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II, Wiley. Civil Engineering 185
References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of
Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and
Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical
Astronomy, Ginn and Co; Manual of Surveys of Dominion
Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors.
Prerequisite: Civil 6.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Lighthall.
15. Perspective Drawing and Descriptive Geometry.—
Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings
and structures, shades and shadows.
Prerequisite: Civil 1.
Text-book: Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie &
Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying ; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by solar and
stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling.
Prerequisite: Civil 7.
Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Lighthall.
17. Structural Design 2. — Selection of types of bridges;
determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional
forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses,
steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams
and retaining walls; complete drawings.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Structural Member and Connections, McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion.
Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vol. Ill, Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Matheson.
18. Engineering Economics. — A general treatment of:
sinking funds; first cost; cost analysis; salvage and scrap values;
yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic
selection. 186 Faculty op Applied Science
General management; banking; partnerships and corporations ; stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business
finance and organization; capital and interpretation of financial
statements.
Text-book: Fish, Engineering Eocnomics, Second Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Waddell and Wait, Specifications and Contracts; Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin.
19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary;
as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders;
specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and
certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance
and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards;
specification and contract writing.
Text-book: Waddell and Wait, Specifications and Contracts,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of
Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable
and Co.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth,
longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of
baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions
of observations; precise levelling.
References: Hosmer,Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Gillespie, Higher Surveying, D. Appleton and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 14.
One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall.
21. Hydraulic Engineering 2. — Waterpower engineering;
rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power problems;
selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power;
mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and
reaction wheels; methods of control and operation of various
forms of machines; transmission of hydraulic power. Civil Engineering 187
Text-books: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Volume I,
Blackie.
References: Mead, Water Power Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or accompany
Civil 21.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
22. Municipal Engineering.—(a) Water Supply, Rainfall;
evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required;
pumping machinery; storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire
service; materials, estimates and designs; construction methods
and costs.
Text-book: Turneaure, Public Water Supply, 3rd Edition,
Wiley. I
Reference: Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
(6) Sewerage and Sewage Disposal. 1. General methods
and economic considerations; quantity and run-off; design
of sewers, manholes, flushtanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and management.
2. Sewage Disposal: physical, chemical, biological and
economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening,
sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management costs.
Text-book: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal, McGraw-Hill.
(c) Town planning; covering the economical and artistic
development of a city, city management. Street cleaning and
disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city wastes;
collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration
and reduction; costs and returns.
Text-book: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley.
Prerequisite; Civil 12.
Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart. 188 Faculty op Applied Science
23. Transportation 2. (a) Railways.—Organization and
rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber
preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories ; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools;
track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and
accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines,
yards and terminals; maximum capacity of single track.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Wilkin.
(b) Highways.—1. Highway economics, surveys and locations; grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction
methods; designs and estimates. ^ ^*
2. Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction,
maintenance and repairs.
Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Matheson.
24. Mechanics of Materials. — A continuation of Civil 10,
Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least
Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in
beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical
sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis
and design of reinforced concrete beams, slabs, columns, and
reinforced concrete arches.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Concrete Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. Ill; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design
of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. J. R. Grant. Civil Engineering 189
25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically determinate framed structures under dead and live loads; distortion
of framed structures; the use of influence lines for analysis of
stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless arches; secondary
stresses and redundant members.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Framed Structures, McGraw-
Hill.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modem
Framed Structures, Vols. I and II, Wiley; Malvern Howe,
Influence Lines, Wiley; Morley, Theory of Structures, Longmans
Green and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Matheson. ^^
26. Class Excursions. — Members of the Fourth Year class
in Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor,
will visit such factories, industrial developments, public works,
docks, shipyards, and important examples of engineering construction as are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the
application and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden
his vision of the engineering field. Written reports of trips are
required.
27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected
topics or analyses of engineering projects; experimental or
theoretical investigations. Topics may be selected from the Civil
Engineering Course: Geodetics, Railways, Hydraulics, Municipal, Highways, Economic and Business Engineering, Structures. Copy of thesis must be filed with the department.
Work extends throughout the year, four hours per week.
28. Seminar. — Written and oral discussion of articles
appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the
various engineering societies, also reviews of important papers
in engineering periodicals. Reports on local engineering projects
visited in Civil 26. Written outlines must be prepared for all
oral reports. Includes training in technical writing and public
speaking. 190 Faculty op Applied Science
Required of all Third and Fourth Year students in Civil
Engineering.
Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill.
One hour per week.
29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and
design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton
and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations, plant design and operation.
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering; Volume I,
Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead,
Water Power Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
30. Engineering Problems 1. — Training in methods of
attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including drill in
systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The
content is based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics and engineering.
Prerequisite: First Year Arts.
Text-books: Swain, How to Study, McGraw-Hill; Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Two two-hour periods per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Barton.
31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the
principal divisions of mathematics given in the First and Second
Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of mechanics,
electricity and heat, surveying and draughting, and applied to
engineering.
Prerequisite: Civil 30.
Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
One three-hour period per week. Economics, Forestry 191
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Barton.
50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with
drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation, simple structures, and surveying. Adapted to the needs of
students in Dairying.
One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart.
Department of Economics
Professor: Theodore H. Boggs.
Associate Professor: H. F. Angus.
Assistant Professor: S. E. Beckett.
Lecturer: N. A. Robertson.
Assistant: George Allen.
Assistant: Doris Lee.
1. Principles of Economics. — An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles
of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc.
Text-books: Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan. The Canada Year Book, 1926.
Two lectures per week.
Department of Forestry
Professor: H. R. Christie.
Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp.
1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject.
Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto University Press.
References: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa. Pinehot, Primer
of Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley, second edition.
Allen, Practical Forestry in the Pacific Northwest, Western
Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest 192 Faculty op Applied Science
Policy in the British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew.
Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-
Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber, of
standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests. Includes
scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of tables of volume,
growth and yield.
Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, second
edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Graves, Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Northern Woodsmen, third
edition, Harvard Press.
One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory
work per week.
3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organizations, prevention and control.
Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland.
Reference books: Millar, Methods of Communication
Adapted to Forest Protection, Dominion Forestry Branch,
Ottawa. U. S. Forest Service, Trail Building in the National
Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
One lecture per week. Second Term.
4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint,
including studies of compound interest, valuation, rotation,
insurance and taxation.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of Michigan.
Reference books: Chapman, Forest Valuation, Wiley. Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley.
Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems, per
week. Second Term.
5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of
wood; the identification of different woods and their qualities Forestry 193
and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the
Canadian woods of commercial importance.
Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United States,
Wiley, second edition. Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood,
Wiley.
Reference books: Weiss, Preservation of Structural Timber,
McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic Structural Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S. Forest Service,
Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Tiemann, The Kiln Drying of Lumber, J. B. Lippincott.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
6. Forest Organization. — The principles and methods of
organizing forest areas for business management. Normal forest,
increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University of
Michigan.
Reference books: Recknagel and Bentley, Forest Management, Wiley. Recknagel, Forest Working Plans, Wiley, second
edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven.
One lecture per week.
7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration. — The
development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest
resources and industries, policy, legislation and education.
Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University
of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich; Forest Policy in
the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our National
Forests, MacMillan. Ise, The United States Forest Policy, Yale
University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the
World, McGraw-Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
8. Silviculture. — Principles and methods of caring for
forests and growing timber crops.
Text-book: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley. 194 Faculty op Applied Science
Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Tourney, Planting and Seeding in the Practice of
Forestry, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley.
Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government
publications.
Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of
three hours field or laboratory work during the second term.
9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles
and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions
of North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition.
Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir
Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow
Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent
of Documents, Washington, D. C.
One lecture per week.
10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems and
operations in the forests of western North America.
Text-book: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region,
U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Reference books: Various articles in the Timberman,
B. C. Lumberman and other trade journals.
One lecture per week throughout the year; one period of
four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with
Forestry 11 and 12.
11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the
Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American
Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and
Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Seeley, Small Saw- Forest Products Laboratories op Canada 195
mills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. First
Term.
12. Forest Products.—A study of other forest industries,
including paper and pulp, naval stores, and wood distillation.
Text-book: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and
Use, Wiley.
Reference books: Whitham, Modem Pulp and Paper
Making, The Chemical Catalog Co.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. Second
Term.
Vancouver Laboratory
Forest Products Laboratories of Canada
T. A. McElhanney, B.A.Sc. (Toronto), D.L.S., B.C.L.S., A.M.E.I.C,
Superintendent.
R. S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), A.M.E.I.C, Timber Tests Engineer.
J. H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Specialist in Wood Seasoning.
H. W. Eades, B.Sc.F. (Washington), Forestry Assistant.
J. B. Alexander, B.Sc. (New Brunswick), D.L.S., A.L.S., Timber
Tester.
J. T. Lee, Timber Tester.
D. S. Wright, Timber Tester.
The Forest Service of the federal Department of the
Interior maintains two Forest Products Laboratories, one at
Montreal, in association with McGill University, and the other at
Vancouver, in association with the University of British
Columbia. The latter was established in 1918 in order to more
adequately deal with forest products research problems of the
western portion of Canada. It was equipped at first only for
timber testing, as British Columbia timbers are of outstanding
importance for structural purposes. The scope of the work of
the laboratory has gradually extended in accordance with the
requirements of the timber industry and now includes lumber 196 Faculty of Applied Science
seasoning investigations, timber decay research, etc. A most
important phase of the work of the laboratory is its technical
service to the timber industries in the dissemination of information on a variety of subjects, such as wood preservation, utilization of wood waste, pulp and paper, wood distillation, ete.
Research in wood preservation and in pulp and paper is, at
present, confined to the, Montreal Laboratory.
An increasingly valuable amount of material has been
collected from the research work of other laboratories and
catalogued for reference.
A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation exists between
the Laboratory and the University, whereby students of the
University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the
laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the
apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff
of the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library
and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related
work.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: T. C. Phemister.
Lecturer: E. M. Burwash.
Assistant: W. A. Jones.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures:
(a) Physical Geology, including: weathering, work of the
wind, the work of ground water, the work of streams, the work
of glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structures of the earth,
earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism,
mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits. Geology and Geography 197
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per
week. First Term. Mr. Schofield.
(6) Historical Geology, including: the earth before the
Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic, and
Quaternary eras.
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per
week. Second Term. Mr. Williams.
The Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology include the
study and identification of the commonest minerals and rocks,
the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the
study of structures by the use of models.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver which illustrate the subject-matter of the
lectures.
The Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology consist of
the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations,
their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence
in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken
up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North
America.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils, Coleman and Parks. Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a 198 Faculty op Applied Science
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-books: Dana, Manual of Mineralogy, revised by Ford
(new edition), Wiley. (For students taking only Geology 2 (a).)
Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. (For
students who subsequently take Geology 2 (6).
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. First Term. Mr. Phemister.
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This
course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2(a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Second Term. Mr. Phemister.
3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life, with special reference to North America.
Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Williams.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
Structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. Geology and Geography 199
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one laboratory period of one hour per
week.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American
Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Paleontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Mr. Williams.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
the following: (a) Optical Mineralogy, (b) Lithology and
Petrogeny, (c) Microscopical Petrography.
Lectures deal with the principles of crystal optics, and with
the origin, occurrence, classification, metamorphism and decay of
rocks.
Laboratory Work consists of the study, determination and
classification of specimens, structures and textures of rocks contained in the departmental collections. Field and microscopical
methods of determination are equally stressed.
Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley;
Luquer, Minerals in Rock Sections, Van Nostrand; Dana, Textbook of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours per
week. Mr. Phemister. 200 Faculty op Applied Science
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore-
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw-
Hill.
Reference book: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 2nd ed.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four lectures per week.
Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite of
ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report. k yf
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination
of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr.Phemister.
10. Field Geology. — The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining. Mathematics 201
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
One period of three hours per week. Mr. Schofield.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Assistant Professor: L. Richardson.
Assistant: Walter H. Gage.
1. Plane Trigonometry.—An elementary course, including
the solution of triangles and the use of logarithms, inverse and
hyperbolic functions.
Text-books: Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry,
Copp, Clark. Six-Place Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. First Term. •
2. Solid Geometry.—A study of the three-faced corner, the
various polyhedra and solid figures, and the theorems of Pappus.
Text-book: Foster, Geometry, Practical and Theoretical,
(Vol. Ill Solid), Bell.
Two lectures per week. Second Term.
3. Algebra.—A review of simple series, permutations, combinations and the binomial theorem, and a study of exponential
and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued
fractions, graphical algebra.
Two lectures per week.
Text-book: Rietz and Crathorne, College Algebra, Holt.
4. Calculus.—An introductory study of the differential
and integral calculus will be made, and some of the simpler
applications considered.
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
Two lectures per week.
6. Calculus.—Differential and integral calculus with various
applications. 202 Faculty op Applied Science
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
Three lectures per week.
7. Analytical Geometry.—A study of the conies and other
curves occurring in engineering practice, and elementary work
in three dimensions.
Text-book: Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell.
Two lectures per week.
8. Applied Calculus. — The applications of calculus to
various problems in engineering.
Two lectures per week.
(Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.)
9. Differential Equations.—A study of ordinary and partial
differential equations and their applications.
Text-book: Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Two lectures per week.
(Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.)
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Professor: Herbert Vickers.
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: F. W. Vernon.
Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering:
H. F. G. Letson.
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: Leonard B. Stacey.
Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: G. Sinclair Smith.
Instructor In Mechanical Engineering: John F. Bell.
Mechanical Engineering
1. Mechanical Drawing.—Practice in freehand lettering in
accordance with common practice. Geometrical Drawing, to give
facility in the use of drawing instruments. Freehand sketching
of machine parts and structures from which drawings are made
to scale. Drawing to scale of simple machine parts. Making of
assembly drawings from detail drawings, and detail drawings
from assembly drawings. Tracing and blueprinting.
Two three-hour periods per week.
2. (a) Shop Work.—This work is intended to supplement
the manual training given in the high schools, and also to give Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 203
the student some knowledge of the more common machine shop
methods and processes as employed commercially. The object is
to provide some basis for the intelligent design of machines and
structural parts.
Lectures.—Physical properties of the materials used in
machine construction. Modern methods of handling and finishing wood. Forging and hammering of metals. Annealing and
tempering. Making of patterns and cores. Cupola practice.
Soldering and brazing, tinning, electroplating. Drilling
and tapping, turning and boring, calipering and fitting, milling
and milling cutters, reaming and reamers, screw cutting. Grinding and abrasive wheels. Lapping. Punching and shearing.
Drop forging and die-casting. Metal spinning. Torch and
electric welding. Cold sawing and torch cutting. Tool-making
and dressing. Use of jigs. Machine shop standards, including
wire and sheet metal gauges, threads, etc.
Text-book: Colvin & Stanley, American Machinists' Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
Practice in Metal-working.—Bench work, including marking
off, chipping, filing, scraping, tapping, and fitting; lathe work,
including turning and boring, screw-cutting and finishing; lathe
adjustments; shaping; milling; gear-cutting; tool-dressing.
One two-hour period per week.
2. (6) Machine Shop Practice.—A continuation of Mechanical Engineering 2.
Five hours laboratory per week First Term, and three hours
Second Term.
3. Kinematics of Machines. — Displacement, velocity and
acceleration. Relative motions. Harmonic motions. Gear trains.
Cams, ratchets, and escapements. Classification of mechanisms.
Study of mechanisms in common use. Transmission of motion
by belting. Design of outlines of gear teeth.
Text-book: Durley, Kinematics of Machines, Wiley.
One two-hour period per week. 204 Faculty op Applied Science
4. Dynamics of Machines.—Friction and lubrication. Transmission of power by belts, ropes, gears and friction clutches.
Function and dynamics of speed governors. Dynamics of the
screw. Forces involved in linear and angular acceleration of
moving parts, with special reference to engines, turbines, and
pumps. Stresses due to centrifugal force. Balancing of moving
parts. Dynamics of the gyroscope.
Reference books: Low, Applied Mechanics. Dent & Harper,
Kinematics and Kinetics of Machinery, Wiley.
Two lectures per week.
5. Machine Design.—Strength of materials used in machine
construction. Factors of safety and allowable stresses under
various conditions of load. Design of: Valve mechanisms for
steam engines; governors; thin cylinders and tanks; rivetted
joints; fastenings, such as bolts, screws and cotters; levers and
winch handles.
Reference books: Spooner, Machine Design, Construction
and Drawing, Longmans Green. Dalby, Valves and Valve
Gears, Arnold.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
6. Elementary Thermodynamics.—(a) Fuels and combustion. General principles underlying the construction and operation of steam boilers. Elementary theory of the steam engine.
Measurement of power. Performance of various types of steam
engines. Elementary theory of internal combustion engines.
Design and operation of isolated power plants to give the best
economic results. Theory of air compressors, transmission and
use of compressed air. Elementary theory and practical operation of producer gas plants.
Text-books: Inchley's Heat Engines, Longmans Green; or
Allen & Bursley, Heat Engines, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge
Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Simmons,
Compressed Air, McGraw-Hill. Marks and Davis, Steam Tables
and Diagrams, Longman's Green. Gebhardt, Steam Power
Plant Engineering, Wiley. Kent, Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 205
Book, Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants,
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
(b) Laboratory.—Testing of boilers, steam engines and
internal combustion engines. Analysis and ealorimetry of fuels.
One three-hour laboratory period per week.
7. Thermodynamics. — A more precise study of the performances and construction of various types of boilers, including
furnaces and superheaters. Theoretical efficiency of different
types of reciprocating engines working under various conditions.
Influence on efficiency of Bize, speed and ratio of expansion
with variations of load. Compound and triple expansion engines.
Use of steam tables in reference to calculations on saturated and
superheated steam. Flow of gases and vapours through orifices
and nozzles.
Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green.
Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge
Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Lucke,
Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill, and as under Mechanical 6.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period
per week.
8. Thermodynamics. — Advanced theory relative to the
transformation of heat into mechanical energy. Laws governing
the flow of heat through various substances. More precise study
of the theory and performance of all types of prime movers,
including all types of reciprocating and rotary steam engines,
steam turbines, and internal combustion engines.
Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green.
Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
9. Thermodynamics.—For Mechanical Engineering students
only.
Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green.
Laboratory text-book: Moyer, Power Plant Testing,
McGraw-Hill. 206 Faculty op Applied Science
Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press.
Two lectures and one six-hour laboratory per week.
10. Machine Design.—The design of machine and structural
parts, including parts of engines of all types; design of appliances for the transmission of power, including belts, rope, cable,
friction and toothed gearing. The student is required to work
out the complete design of some machine or appliance, and make
the drawings and tracings requisite for its construction.
Text-book: Spooner, Machine Design, Longmans Green.
Two lectures and one five-hour laboratory per week for
Mechanical Engineering, and two lectures and one three-hour
laboratory for Electrical Engineering.
11. Heating, Ventilation, and Refrigeration. — Design of
steam, hot water, and hot air systems of heating. Heaters for
steam and water systems. Use of exhaust steam for heating.
Central heating plants. Loss of heat from buildings. Refrigerating systems.
Reference book: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment
of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley.
One lecture per week.
12. Design of Power Plants.—A study of the function, construction, and performance of the various machines and appliances which enter into the design of industrial plants. Special
attention is given to the economic results to be expected from
various combinations.
Reference books: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. Fernald & Orrok,
Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
13. Physical Treatment of Metals.—A study of the various
metals used in commercial work, with special reference to the
treatment applied to get the physical properties and qualities
required for specific purposes. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 207
Text-book: Colvin & Juthe, The Working of Steel, McGraw-
Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour laboratory per week.
14. Mechanical Design of Electrical Machines.
Electrical Engineering
1. Theory and Operation of Electrical Machines.—A practical course for students not specializing in Electrical or
Mechanical Engineering. Units: Absolute electrostatic and
electromagnetic, practical units, conversion factors.
Magnetic Circuit: Unit magnetic pole, field, intensity,
induction; flux, magnetomotive force, reluctance, permeability,
potential, B-H curves, hysteresis. Electric Circuit: Unit quantity,
current and current density, electromotive force, Ohms Law,
Joules Law, Kirchhoff's Laws, resistivity and specific resistance,
conductivity and conductance; induction, self and mutual.
Direct Current Machines: The dynamo, motor and generator; Emf. equation; armature, simple lap and wave; excitation; characteristic curves of series, shunt, separately and compound excited generators and motors; armature reaction;
commutation; efficiency, rating and heating; types of motors
suited to various classes of service; boosters; balancers for three
wire systems; parallel operation of generators.
Alternating Current: The production of simple alternating
electromotive forces and currents; wave form; form factor;
frequency; maximum, average, and root-mean-square values;
effect of induction and capacity on the properties of alternating
current circuits; vector diagrams; measurement of power; power
factor; polyphase circuits; Y and Delta connections.
Alternating Current Machines—Alternator: Emf. equation;
armature winding: magneto-motive forces and fluxes; armature
reaction; leakage reactance; regulation; efficiency. Synchronous
Motor: Principle; vector diagram; output; power factor; synchronizing; hunting; parallel operation of alternators. Transformer: Constant potential1 vector diagrams; leakage reactance; 208 Faculty of Applied Science
constant current; losses; efficiency; connections; phase transformation; auto and booster transformers. Induction Motor:
Revolving field; slip; characteristics; circle diagram; variable
speed; wound rotor induction motor; choice of type1 starting.
Rotary Converters: Description of operation.
Transmission of Electrical Energy: Comparison of cost of
transmission with different number of phases; instrument transformers.
The above course is designed to introduce to the students
the principal factors in electrical machinery; only enough theory
being given to explain intelligently the operating characteristics
of the apparatus studied.
Text-books: Gray, Principles and Practice of Electrical
Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory
Course for Junior Students, Blackie & Sons.
Prerequisite: Physics 3.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week.
2. Elementary Electrical Engineering.—Units: Absolute,
electrostatic, electromagnetic and practical units.
Electromagnetism- Permeability; flux-density; magnetomotive force; magnetic reluctance; calculation of pull of electromagnets; inductance, self and mutual.
Commercial Current and Voltage Measuring Instruments'-
Requirements of good measuring instruments, amperemeters and
voltmeters; construction and moving-coil; hot-wire; electrostatic
and induction-type measuring instruments.
Secondary Batteries'- Theory; use and application.
Armature Winding■' Theory of lap and wave windings; use
of equalizing connections; characteristics of series, shunt and
compound wound motors; characteristics of shunt and compound
wound generators; commutation, and armature reaction in direct
current machines. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 209
Elementary Theory of Alternating Currents: The production of simple alternating electromotive forces and currents;
wave form, frequency, crest and RMS valves; Cartesian and
Polar diagrams; effect of self induction and capacity on the
properties of alternating current circuits; measurement of power
in A.C. circuits; polyphase circuits, balanced and unbalanced
systems; star and mesh connections; vector treatment.
Elementary Theory of the Transformer. Automatic Reversible Battery Boosters. Testing of apparatus studied.
Wave Form Indicators: The Oscillograph, Joubert's contact, the Ondograph.
Insulation'- Characteristics of various types, switches and
fuses.
Illumination and Photometry: Arc Lamps, Incandescent
Lamps, Street Illumination, etc.
Text-books: MacCall, Electrical Engineering Continuous
Currents, University Tutorial Press Ltd. MacCall, Electrical
Engineering Alternating Currents, University Tutorial Press
Ltd. Smith, Testing Dynamos and Motors, Scientific Publishing
Co. Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior
Students, Blackie & Sons. Bennett & Crothers, Electro-
Dynamics, McGraw-Hill.
For Third Year Electrical and Mechanical students only.
Prerequisite: Physics 3.
Three lectures and one laboratory period of four hours per
week.
3. Electrical Engineering. — Direct Current Machines:
Separation of losses by various methods; back to back methods
of testing efficiency; parallel operation; review of armature
reaction and the compensating thereof; further study of commutation.
Alternating Current Machines: The Alternator; Induced
Electromotive force, Armature winding, Magnetomotive forces
and fluxes concerned in the operation of an Alternator, Arma- 210 Faculty op Applied Science
ture Reaction, Armature leakage reactance, Armature effective
Resistance, Regulation, Methods of predetermining Regulation
and the vector diagrams thereof, Losses, Efficiency.
Static Transformers: Types of Transformers, The Ideal
Transformer, True equivalent circuit of a Transformer, Approximate equivalent circuit of a transformer, Calculation of
Magnetizing current and inphase current supplying Core losses,
Calculation of leakage reactance, Solution of the vector diagram
and Calculation of Regulation, Losses in a Transformer—Eddy
Current Loss—Hysteresis Loss—Copper Loss, Calculation of
Efficiency, Ratio Test, Polarity Test, Short Circuit Test. Calculation of Regulation from the short circuit Test, Regulation by
loading, Sumpner efficiency Test, Separation of Hysteresis and
Eddy Current loss Test, Current Transformer, Potential Transformer, Constant Current Transformer, Auto-Transformer,
Induction Regulator, Parallel operation of Transformers, Transformer Connections, Phase Transformation.
Synchronous Motors: General characteristics, Power factor,
V Curves, Methods of starting, Explanation of the operation of
a Synchronous Motor, Hunting, Damping, Stability, Circle diagram of the Synchronous Motor, Losses and Efficiency, Parallel
operation of Alternators.
Synchronous Converters: Voltage Ratio and current relations, Armature heating and resistance and the effect thereof
of change in power factor.
Polyphase Induction Motors: Revolving field, slip, Transformer properties of an Induction Motor, True and approximate
equivalent circuit of an induction motor, Load equivalent to a
non inductive resistance, Circle diagram, Characteristic Curves,
Methods of starting Induction Motors, Speed Control.
Transmission of Electrical Energy: A brief treatment dealing with the economy of conducting material for different number of phases.
Text-books: Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific
Publishing Co. Lawrence, Principles of Alternating Current
Machinery, McGraw-Hill. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 211
For Fourth Year Mechanical students only.
Prerequisite: Electrical 2.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of three hours per
week.
4, Electrical Machinery. Theory of the Transformer. Core
and Shell types. Vector diagrams. Magnetizing current, Regulation, Current Rush on suddenly switching on. Systems of
Connection. Methods of Cooling. Testing.
The Alternator. Salient and non-salient pole types. Alternator windings. EMF equation. Breadth factor, Form Factor,
Coil-span Factor. Method of obtaining pure sine wave form.
Regulation. Calculation of Regulation. Synchronous Impedance.
Short Circuit Currents. Method of Calculating excitation on
loads of various power factors. Synchronizing of alternators.
Synchroscopes. Parallel Operation of Alternators.
The Synchronous Motor. Single and Polyphase Typea
Vector diagram. Variation of power factor with excitation.
Calculation of excitation necessary for power factor improvement. Damping windings. Hunting and its cure. Methods of
Starting.
The Induction Motor. Windings. Production of Rotating
field, Circle diagram. Slip, torque and other characteristics.
Squirrel Cage and Slip Ring Types. Effect of rotor resistance.
Torque slip curves. Starting methods of Squirrel cage machines. Calculation of steps of starting resistances for wound
rotor machines. Crawling of Induction motors. Leakage fluxes
in Induction motors. Pole changing. Cascade Connection and
its characteristics. Speed Control by rotor resistance, by change
of frequency, by use of AC commutating motors. Hunt Cascade
motor.
Efficiency Tests. Stroboscopic method of slip measurement.
Single Phase Induction Motor Theory.
The Rotary Converter. EMF and current relations. Heat- 212 Faculty of Applied Science
ing of Rotaries. Methods of Changing voltage ratios. Starting
and Synchronizing.
The Three Phase Commutator Motor. Shunt and Series
Types. Vector diagrams and characteristics.
Text-books: Miles Walker, Specification and Design of
Electrical Machinery, Longmans, Green & Co. Lawrence,
Alternating Currents, McGraw-Hill. Steinmetz, Theory and
Calculation of Electric Apparatus, McGraw-Hill. H. Vickers,
The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of six hours per
week.
5. Electric Traction.—Electric Railways: advantages and
disadvantages of various systems. Low tension DC and high
tension DC. High tension systems. Speed-time curves and their
estimation. Estimation of power required for electric trains.
Train Resistance. Series Traction Motors DC and AC and their
complete theory and characteristics. Control and Control Systems. Equipment and Rolling Stock. Regenerative Braking.
Overhead construction and rail construction. Feeder systems
and their design. Sub-station Equipment.
Text-books: A. T. Dover, Electric Traction, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. F. W. Carter, Electric Traction, Chapman & Hall.
One lecture per week.
6. Electric Power Plants and Transmission Lines. — Comparison of amounts of Copper for Various Systems. Choice of
Site and type of machinery. Load Factor and diversity factor.
Inductance and Capacity Calculations. Voltage drops on Single
Phase and Three phase lines. Charging currents. Voltage rises
on AC systems. Automatic Protective Switch-gear. Lightning
Arresters. Kelvin's Law. Design of Feeders. Voltage drops in
feeders and cables. Conductors and disributing networks; loss
of potential in networks. Voltage control. Tirrill Regulator.
Economics of hydro-electric development. Design of E.H.T.
feeders. Suspension Type Insulators and other types. Mechanical design of line and towers. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 213
Corona. Losses due to Corona. Laws of Corona. Voltage
and Power Factor Control of Transmission lines.
Text-book: Still, Overhead Power Transmission, McGraw-
Hill.
Two lectures per week.
One lecture per week.
7. Electrical Design.—Design of DC generators and motors.
Induction motors. Salient and non-salient Pole Alternators.
Rotary Converters. Transformers.
Text-books: Slichter, Design of Electrical Machinery,
Wiley & Sons. Miles Walker, Specification and Design of Electrical Machinery, Longmans, Green & Co. H. Vickers, The
Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. Whittaker, The
Rotary Converter, Benn Bros.
One lecture per week.
8. Radio, Telegraphy and Telephony. — Open and closed
oscillators. Resonance. Coupled Circuits. Forced and free vibrations. Waves on coils and wires.
Antennae and Earth Connections. Propagation of waves
over the earth's surface.
Generation of Oscillations. Spark. Arc. High-frequency
Alternator. Frequency Changers and Ionic Valves.
Methods of Detection. Valve Circuits, beat reception, relaying, amplifying, with special attention to work on Ionic Valves.
Wireless Telephony. Microphones: Various Types. Transmitting Circuits. Receiving Circuits. Tuning.
Direction Finding. Latest work on above. Interference and
its prevention. Short Wave Work with Beam Systems.
Text-book: Eccles, Continuous Wave Telegraphy and Telephony, Van Nostrand. Morecroft, Principles of Radio Communication, Wiley & Sons.
One lecture per week. 214 Faculty op Applied Science
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
Professor of Mining: J. M. Turnbull.
Professor of Metallurgy: H. N. Thomson.
Associate Professor of Mining: Geo. A. Gillies.
Assistant in Metallurgy: W. B. Bishop.
Mining
1. Metal Mining.—An introductory course in metal mining,
covering the following subjects:
Ores and economic minerals; economic basis of mining;
ordinary prospecting; mineral belts; conditions in British
Columbia; preliminary development of mines; timbering and
framing; tunnelling; shaft sinking; transportation and haulage;
drainage; ventilation.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull.
2. Coal and Placer Mining.—A general course in coal and
placer mining, covering the following subjects:
(a) Classification of coals; prospecting; mine development;
mining methods; ventilation; transportation and haulage; drainage ; tipples; coal mines acts and laws.
(b) Gravel deposits; nature and origin of paystreaks; prospecting ; examination and testing of deposits; ordinary mining
methods; hydraulic and dredging methods; plant and equipment ; placer mines acts and laws.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull.
3. Metal Mining. — An advanced course in metal mining,
covering the following subjects:
Scientific prospecting; development work in mines; mining
methods; blasting and explosives; examination of mines and
prospects; methods of ore sampling; mine valuation; accounting
and costs, administration; welfare and safety work; mining laws
and contracts; economics; ethics.
Prerequisite: Mining 1.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. Mining and Metallurgy 215
4. Mining Machinery.—A special course covering the structural and mechanical features of Mining Engineering, as follows:
Mine structures; mining plant and machinery; core and
churn drills; tramways, etc.
Prerequisites: Mining 1; Mechanical Engineering 3, 6;
Civil Engineering 3 and 10.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies.
5. Mine Surveying.—A practical course covering the work
of the surveyor and staff in metal mines:
Methods and practice in mine surveying; geological work
underground; maps, plans and models; notes and records.
Prerequisites: Civil Engineering 2 and 6.
One lecture per week. First Term. Mr. Turnbull.
6. Mining Design.—A laboratory draughting course covering the special requirements of Mining students in regard to
design of the layout and details of mining plant, structures, and
mine survey plans.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Gillies.
7. Mining Methods.—A special course covering the mining
of large ore bodies by special mining methods.
Prerequisite: Mining 1.
Concurrent Courses: Mining 2, 3 and 4.
One lecture per week. Second Term. Mr. Turnbull.
Metallurgy
1. General Metallurgy.—This course covers the fundamental
principles underlying metallurgical operations in general, and
is introductory to subsequent more specialized study.
The lectures follow in general the subject as taken up in
Principles of Metallurgy, by Chas. H. Fulton, including the
following main subjects:
Physical mixtures and thermal analysis. Physical properties
of metals. Alloys. Measurement of high temperatures. Typical
metallurgical operations. Roasting and fusing. Electrometallurgy. Slags. Matte. Bullion. Refractory materials. Fuels.
Combustion. Furnaces. 216 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book: Fulton, Principles of Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Hofman, General Metallurgy, McGraw-
Hill. Current • Mining and Metallurgical Journals. Trade
Catalogues.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 and 2.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson.
2. Smelting and Leaching.—A general course covering principles and practice of Pyrometallurgy and Hydrometallurgy as
applied to gold, silver, copper, iron, lead and zinc.
Prerequisite: Metallurgy 1.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson.
3. Metallurgical Calculations.—A special course covering
Thermochemistry; Metallurgical Calculations; Furnace Design
and Efficiency; Special Processes.
A large portion of the time will be given to the study of
heat balances of typical smelting operations.
Reference book: Richards, Metallurgical Calculations.
Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Chemistry 1.
Two hours per week. Mr. Thomson.
4. Metallurgical Analysis.—Advanced course in Metallurgical Analysis of Ores and Furnace Products, Pyrometry and
Refractories.
Special attention will be given to analytical methods used
by smelting plants in purchase of ores and control of furnace
operations.
Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Metallurgy 6.
Six hours laboratory per week, First Term. Twelve houn
laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Thomson.
5. Fire Assaying.—Quantitative determination of gold,
silver, and other metals by fire-assay methods, with underlying
principles. Mining and Metallurgy 217
Text-book: Fulton, Manual of Fire Assaying, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and one five-hour laboratory period per week.
First Term. Mr. Thomson.
6. Wet Assaying.—An introductory course in metallurgical
analysis of ores and concentrates.
Most of the time will be given to the technical determination
of zinc, copper and lead.
One three-hour laboratory period per week. Mr. Thomson.
Ore Dressing
1. Ore Dressing.—A general course covering the concentration of ores by mechanical means.
Most of the time is spent in considering fundamental
principles, typical machines, and their general operations and
relations in modern milling practice, emphasizing the economic
and practical aspects.
Students are taught the commercial and technical characteristics of true concentrating ores, the general principles on which
the size, character, site, and other features of a mill are designed.
The general lay-out of crushing, handling, and separating machinery. The laws of crushing and of various classifying and
separating actions, and the design, operation, and comparative
efficiency of typical machines, such as crushers, rolls, stamps,
ball and tube mills, jigs, tables, screens, classifiers, and slime-
handling devices.
Attention is paid to pneumatic, magnetic, electrostatic, flotation, and other special processes, including coal-washing.
Text-books: F. Taggart, A Manual of Flotation Processes,
Wiley.
Reference Books: S. J. Truscott, Text-book of Ore Dressing.
Richards and Locke, Text-book of Ore Dressing.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies.
2. Ore Dressing Laboratory.—A variety of crushing, sizing,
classifying and separating operations are carried out by the
students and studied quantitatively on appropriate machines. 218 Faculty of Applied Science
singly and in combination. Special attention is paid to flotation
processes, several types of machines being used.
Ores from British Columbia mines are usually chosen, so
that the work of the students is along practical lines in comparison with actual work in operating plants.
Prerequisite: Ore Dressing 1.
Nine hours laboratory per week. Mr. Gillies.
Note.—All students in Mining and Metallurgy are advised to provide
themselves with a copy of Peele's Mining Engineer's Handbook (Wiley),
which is used for reference in many of the courses in which no special textbook is required.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: D. F. Stedman.
The instruction includes lectures on the general principles
of Physics, accompanied by courses of practical work in the
laboratory.
1. Mechanics 1.—An elementary treatment of the subject of
statics, dynamics, and hydrostatics, with particular emphasis on
the working of problems. The course is given in the first half
of the First Year of Applied Science.
Text-books: Loney, Mechanics and Hydrostatics, Cambridge
University Press. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and
Heat, Ginn.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per
week.
2. Advanced Heat.—This course is begun when Mechanics 1
is finished, and the six hours devoted to it are divided in the
same manner. The course is based on the supposition that the
student is already familiar with the elementary principles of
heat. Physics 219
Text-books: Edser, Heat for Advanced Students, Macmillan. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn.
3. Electricity and Magnetism.—A quantitative study of the
fundamental principles of electricity and magnetism, with a
special reference to the fact that the student is to be an engineer.
The course includes a short treatment of the elements of
alternating currents.
Text-books: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and
Light (first part), Ginn. Smith, Electrical Measurements,
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
4. Mechanics 2.—The subject-matter consists of an extension
of the statics and dynamics of Mechanics 1, but with the use of
the differential and integral calculus.
Prerequisite: Mechanics 1.
Text-book: Poorman, Applied Mechanics, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
5. Light. — A short lecture course on light for students
taking Chemical Engineering. The time will be devoted to a
study of refraction, dispersion, interference, diffraction, double-
refraction, polarization and spectroscopy.
One hour per week.
9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory,
and radioactivity.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10.
Reference books: Thomson, Conductivity of Electricity
Through Gases, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition.
Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their Radiations,
Cambridge University Press. Millikan, Electron, University of
Chicago Press, Second Edition. Thomson, Positive Rays, Longman's. Hughes, Photo-electricity, Cambridge University Press,
X-Rays, Longman's. 220 Faculty of Applied Science
Department of Nursing and Health
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Assistant Professor: Mabel F. Gray.
Part-time Lecturers:
Miss Elizabeth Gertrude Breeze, R. N.
Mrs. Eva D. Calhoun, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (Ann Arbor, Michigan).
John Ewart Campbell, B.A., M.D., C.M. (McGill).
Ralph Elswood Coleman, M.B. (Toronto).
William A. Dobson, M.D. (Jefferson Medical College).
Miss Isabelle M Jeffares, R.N.
Miss Jane E. Johnston, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (British Columbia).
Miss Ruby Adeline Kerr.
Frank Cornwall McTavish, M.B. (Toronto), L.S.A. (London),
M.R.C.S. (England), L.R.C.P. (London).
Robert Lester Pallen, D.M.D. (North Pacific College of
Dentistry).
Alfred Howard Spohn, M.B. (Toronto).
Frederic Theodore Underhill, L.R.C.P. &S., L.M., and F.R.C.S.
(Edinburgh), D.P.H. (Edinburgh and Glasgow), F.R.S.I.
London), F.R.I.P.H.
Charles Harvey Vrooman, M.D., C.M. (Manitoba).
Harold White, M.D. (McGill), L.M.C.C.
Henry Esson Young, B.A. (Queen's), M.D., CM., (McGill),
LL.D. (Toronto), LL.D. (McGill), LL.D. (British Columbia), L.M.C.C.
Subjects of Nursing A
(Five-year Undergraduate Course)
1. Introduction to Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing
with the nature of hospital service and discipline, designed to
prepare students for entrance to Schools of Nursing. No formal
credit is given for this course, but attendance is compulsory.
One hour per week, First Year. Miss Gray.
2. History of Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with
the origin and history of nursing.
One hour a week, Second Year. Miss Gray.
3. Anatomy and Physiology.—A study of the structure and
function of the normal human body as the basis for the study of
all pathological conditions, as well as for the study of hygiene.
Two hours a week, Second Year. Miss Gray. Nursing and Health 221
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Preventive Medicine in the Public Health Nursing Programme
1. Preventable Diseases. — Brief sketches of the more
important of the preventable diseases; immunology; vaccine
therapy.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill.
2. Epidemiology.—Principles and practice in the control of
disease.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill.
3. Tuberculosis.—A study of tuberculosis, its prevention
and cure.
Eleven lectures. Dr. Vrooman.
4. Venereal Diseases.—The care and control of venereal
Three lectures. Dr .Campbell.
5. Mental Hygiene.—An introduction, with clinical demonstrations, to the study of mental illness, its cure and prevention.
Eleven lectures. Dr. Dobson.
6. Bacteriology.—A short laboratory course to familiarize
students with the practical application of laboratory technique
in Public Health measures.
Ten hours. Miss Wilson.
Child Welfare
7. Infant Welfare.—A series of lectures and clinics dealing
with pre-natal care, and the normal development of the infant;
also dealing with the disorders of infancy, their prevention and
cure.
Eleven hours. Dr. Spohn.
8. Orthopedics.—A series of lectures dealing with the problem of children handicapped by deformities, with emphasis
upon the importance of early recognition of deformities and
their prevention and cure.
Five hours. Dr. McTavish. 222 Faculty of Applied Science
Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation
Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation.
9. Public Health.—A series of lectures covering the fields
of general hygiene and sanitation.
One hour a week. Fifteen lectures. Dr. Hill.
10. Public Health Administration.—A study of the official
relation of the Public Health Nurse to the Departments of
Health.
Four lectures. Dr. Underhill, Dr. Young.
11. Public Health Organizations.—A series of single lectures dealing with special aspects of their work.
(a) Diagnostic Clinics for Tuberculosis. Dr. Lamb.
(b) The Hospital's Relation to the Community Health Programme. Dr. Bell, a
(c) The Rotary Clinic. Dr. Rawlings.
(d) The Workmen's Compensation Act. Dr. Bastin.
12. Vital Statistics.—The general principles governing the
collection and arrangement of statistical facts, and their application in Public Health Nursing.
One hour a week. Eighteen lectures. Dr. Hill.
Nursing
13. Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing.—
A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
Text-book: Gardner, Public Health Nursing, Macmillan.
14. Rural Public Health Nursing.—A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing in rural communities.
Six hours. Miss Jeffares.
15. Urban Visiting Nursing Programme.
Two lectures. Mrs. Calhoun.
16. Methods in Health Teaching.—A consideration of the Nursing and Health 223
material to be presented in the teaching of personal hygiene and
home nursing, and the methods of presentation.
One hour a week. Second Term. Miss Gray.
17. History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems.—A study of the origin and history of nursing, followed
by the consideration of recent developments in the nursing field.
Eleven lectures a week. Miss Gray.
18. Teaching in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the Curriculum; the selection of subjects, and content of each, and
methods of presentation.
One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
19. Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing.—A
study of the organization of the School of Nursing, its relation
to the various departments of the Hospital; and the problems
of training and record keeping.
One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
20. School Hygiene.—A series of twelve lectures given by
members of the staff of the Medical Departmnt of the Vancouver
School Board, dealing with the specific problems of this division
of Public Health.
One hour a week. First Term. Miss Breeze, Miss Kerr,
Dr. Pallen, Dr. White.
21. Hospital Social Service.—A presentation of the principles underlying Medical Social Service.
Three lectures. Miss Johnston.
22. Metabolism and Nutrition.
Ten lectures. Dr. Coleman.
23. Psychology for Nurses.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Wyman.
24. Principles of Education Applied to Teaching.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Weir.
25. Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure.—Prin- 224 Faculty op Applied Science
ciples and practice, fitting students for giving addresses and
conducting meetings.
One hour a week. Thirteen hours. Dr. Hill.
26. Sociology.—The nature of Sociology as a study; environment; influence of technology and other conditions on social
development, etc.; social pathology.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Beckett.
Text-book: Beach, Introduction to Sociology, Houghton-
Mifflin.
27. Geography 10.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Brock, Mr. Schofield.
28. Motor Mechanics. ^^T
Practical instruction in the structure and operation of automobiles, including practice driving.
One hour a week. One Term. Mr. Bell.
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith.
Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell.
Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals.
Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.
Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: T. J. Parker and W. A. Haswell, Manual of
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Zoology, Macmillan (American Edition, 1916).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week.
7. Economic Entomology (in part).—The portion of the
course in Economic Entomology that deals with forest insects.
One lecture and two hours' laboratory work per week for
half of Second Term.
(Not given in 1927-28.) THE £s
FACULTY
OF
AGRICULTURE 226
Faculty op Agriculture
TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE-
FIRST
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Roost
Wednesday
Room
9-10
jAgronomy 1
AglOO
English I b
A 100
AglOO
Agronomy 1
AglOO
Poultry 1
10-11
Animal
Husbandry I
AglOO
Biology 1
AplOO
AplOl
French 1
A 104
A 204
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
11-12
Zoology 1
12-1
1-2
Chemistry 1 a ....
English 2 b
S300
A 100
Agronomy 1
Bacteriology 1
Agl03
S
Chemistry 1 a
English 2 a
S100
A 100
2-3
Agronomy 1
Bacteriology 1
Agl03
S
Botany 1 Lab...
' AP
3-4
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1 _
Bacteriology 1 ...
S
S
Agronomy 1
Chemistry 2 Lab b
Agl03
S
Botany 1 Lab...
Ap
4-5
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1
Bacteriology 1 ....
S
S
Chemistry 2 Lab b
S
5-6
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1
Bacteriology 1 ....
s
s
Chemistry 2 Lab b
S
SECOND
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
AglOO
English 1 b
A 100
AglOO
Agronomy 2
AglOO
9-10
Dairying 1
10-11
Horticulture 1 ....
AglOO
Animal
Husbandry 4
AglOO
Animal
Husbandry 4
AglOO
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
French 1
A 104
A 204
Biology 1 .
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
11-12
Botany 1
12-1
1-2
Chemistry 1 a ....
English 2 b
S300
A 100
Agronomy 2
Agl03
Chemistry 1 a ...
English 2 a
S300
A 100
2-3
Dairying 1 Lab..
Agl08
Agronomy 2
Agl03
Botany 1 Lab-
Ap
3-4
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Dairying 1 Lab.
S
Agl08
S
Agl08
S
Agronomy 2
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
Agl03
S
Botany 1 Lab....
Ap
4-5
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Dairying 1 Lab..
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
5-6
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; Time Table
227
-1927-28
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS.
TERM
Thubsday
Room
Fmday
Room
Satubday
Room
English lb
A100
Poultry 1
AglOO
English 1 a ,
Poultry 1
A 100
Agl02
9-10
Animal
Husbandry 1
Chemistry 2
Agll4
S800
Poultry 1
Agl02
10-11
French 1 .
A 104
A 204
Animal
Husbandry 1
Agll4
French 1 .
Poultry 1
A 104
Agl02
Botany 1
11-12
12-1
Zoology 1 Lab
Ap
Chemistry 1 a —
English 2 a
S300
A 100
1-2
English 1 a
Zoology 1 Lab
A 100
Ap
Bacteriology 1
S
2-3
Animal
Husbandry 1 .
Chemistry 2 Lab. k
Agll4
S
Bacteriology 1 ......
S
3-4
Animal
Husbandry 1 .
Chemistry 2 Lab. h
Agll4
S
Biology 1 Lab. 6...
Ap
4-5
Chemistry 2 Lab. bj S
Biology 1 Lab. 6...
Ap
5-6
TERM
Thubsday
Room
1 Fbiday
Room
Satubday
Room
English 1 b
A 100
Dairying 1
AglOO
English 1 a
A 100
9-10
Animal
Husbandry 4 .
Chemistry 2
AglOO
S300
AglOO
10-11
French 1
A 104
A 204
Horticulture 1 -
French 1
A 104
Botany 1
11-12
12-1
Zoology 1 Lab.
Ap
Chemistry 1 a
English 2 a
S300
A 100
1-2
English 1 a
A 100
Ap
Horticulture 1 ....
Agl04
Zoology 1 Lab
2-3
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
Horticulture 1 ....
Agl04
3-4
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
s
Biology 1 Lab
Horticulture 1 ....
Ap
Agl04
4-5
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
s
Biology I Lab.....
Ap
5-6
Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE
INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS IN
AGRICULTURE
The degrees offered in this faculty are:
Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.) and Master of
Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.).
Courses of Study
Five distinct lines of study are offered, as follows:
(1.) A Four-year Course leading to the Degree of Bachelor
of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.).
(2.) A One-year Occupational Course in which the basic
work is in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying,
Horticulture, and Poultry Husbandry, leading to a
Diploma in Agriculture.
(3.) A series of Short Courses at the University, in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and
Poultry Husbandry.
(4.) Extension Courses at different points in the Province.
(5.) Graduate work in Agriculture, leading to the degree,
M.S.A.
Course Leading to the Degree of B.S.A.
Students in Agriculture are required to have Junior
Matriculation or its equivalent before entering upon this course
(see "Matriculation Requirements"). The degree of B.S.A. is
granted only after the successful completion of four years of
lecture and laboratory work. The course is planned for students
who wish to obtain a practical and scientific knowledge of
Agriculture, either as a basis for demonstration and teaching,
or as an aid to success in farm management.
The Occupational Course
The Occupational Course is planned for those students
whose academic qualifications are not high, but whose practical 230 Faculty of Agriculture
qualifications are satisfactory. The course permits of work in
Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Poultry Husbandry, Dairying,
Horticulture, Farm Management and Marketing on the part of
those who wish to extend their practical knowledge. A successful completion of the course leads to a Diploma in Agriculture.
Matriculation standing for entrance is not required.
A printed descriptive folder giving further details of this
course may be secured on application to the Registrar, University of British Columbia.
Short Courses
The Short Courses are planned for those men and women
who are unable to take advantage of the longer courses, but who
desire to extend their knowledge of agriculture in one or more
of those branches in which they are particularly interested. The
work throughout is intensely practical. Illustrative material and
periods devoted to demonstration and judging work are strong
features of the course. No entrance examination is required, nor
are students asked to write an examination at the conclusion
of the course.
Special announcements giving details of the various divisions of the course are issued in December of each year, and
may be obtained from the Registrar on application.
Extension Courses
In order to reach those engaged in Agriculture who are
not able to avail themselves of the Winter Courses given at the
University, the Faculty of Agriculture offers extension Bhort
courses in various centres throughout the Province. These
courses are of at least four days' duration, are proceeded with
according to a definite time-table, and include lectures and
demonstrations in connection with the work of each department
of the Faculty. Detailed programmes are prepared to suit the
specific centres, and requests for such courses may be addressed
to the Registrar.
(Not offered in 1927-28.) Courses in Agriculture 231
Graduate Work
For regulations, see page 236.
CURRICULUM
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period
of not less than two or more than three hours) per week
throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent
laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
The first two years of work leading to the degree in
Agriculture are devoted to acquiring a knowledge of the basic
sciences upon which Agriculture rests, in adding to the student's
knowledge of language, and in laying a foundation for more
advanced studies in practical and scientific Agriculture. The
Third Year is devoted largely, and the Fourth Year almost
wholly, to courses in Applied Agriculture.
Except under special circumstances, students under the age
of seventeen will not be eligible for registration. Specialization
will begin at the commencement of the Third Year. Students
who have not had at least one full season's practical farm
experience will be required to obtain this preliminary training
before registering for the Third Year.
First Year
Units
Agronomy (1 and 2) 3
Animal Husbandry (1 and 4) 3
Biology 1 3
Chemistry 1 3
English 1 3
The first course in a language offered for
Matriculation 3
Total required 18 232 Faculty op Agriculture
Second Year
Units
Poultry Husbandry 1 IV2
Horticulture 1 l1/^
Dairying 1 IV2
Botany 1 3
Zoology 1 3
English 2 3
Bacteriology 1 2
Chemistry 2 3
Total required 18^
Third and Fourth Years
On account of the specialized types of farming which must
necessarily be followed in many parts of British Columbia, the
work in the Third and Fourth Years leading to the degree of
B.S.A. has been arranged in major courses so as to admit of a
measure of specialization in one of the several recognized
branches of Agriculture. At the same time all courses have
been so arranged that every student will get the basic work in
all lines no matter what option is chosen.
Prior to the beginning of the Third Year every student must
indicate in which one of the major options he wishes to continue
his study, and shall arrange his elective courses with the approval
of the Head of the Department in which he is majoring, and
in consultation with the Heads of other Departments directly
concerned.
A thesis shall be prepared by each student on some topic,
the subject of which shall be selected, with the approval of the
Head of the Department in which the student is majoring, before
the end of the Third Year's work.
Two typewritten copies of each thesis on standard-sized
paper (8V2 in- hy 11 in.) shall be submitted on or before the
1st of April in the graduating year.
Agricultural students are required to take a total of 35
units, thesis included, in their Third and Fourth Years. Courses in Agriculture 233
Third Year
(Required subjects)
Units
Economics 1 3
Chemistry (Special Course) 3
(for all except Dairy Students)
Principles of Heredity—Biology 2 1
Total required 7
Fourth Year
(Required subjects) I
Units
Agricultural Economics iy2
Thesis 3
Total required 4y^
Agronomy Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 7
Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2
Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2
Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2
•Total 13
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above iy2
Animal Husbandry 9 iy2
•Total 6
* Students are required, with the advice and consent of the
Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18
units. 234 Faculty op Agriculture
Animal Husbandry Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 7
•Total 7
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4*/2
Agronomy 7 iy2
•Total 6
Dairying Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4
Chemistry 3 3
•Total 7
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4y2
Civil Engineering (Special) 1
Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2
Dairy Chemistry 2
•Total 9y2
* Students are required, with the advice and consent of the
Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 1&
units. Courses in Agriculture 235
Horticulture Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 7
Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2
Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2
Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2
•Total 13
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4^2
Plant Pathology—Botany 6 (c) 2
•
Total
Y2
Poultry Husbandry Major
Third Year
^ Units
Required subjects, as above 7
•Total : 7
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4%
•Total iy2
Botany (Plant Pathology) Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 7
•Total T~
* Students are required, with the advice and consent of the
Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18
units. 236 Faculty op Agriculture
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above iy2
•Total 4%
Zoology (Entomology) Major
Third Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 7
•Total 7
Fourth Year
Units
Required subjects, as above 4%
*
Total 4*£
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.S.A.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.) must hold a bachelor's degree from this
University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a
student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the master's degree shall be required:
(a.) To spend at least one year in resident graduate
study; or
* Students are required, with the advice and consent of the
Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18
units. Examinations and Advancement 237
(b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned):
(i.) To do two or more years of private work
under the supervision of the University,
such work to be equivalent to one year of
graduate study; or
(ii.) To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term of
resident graduate study, the total of such
work to be equivalent to one year of
resident graduate study.
4. Students doing tutorial work shall not be. allowed to come
up for final examination in less than two academic years after
registration as M.S.A. students. 1 ^
5. One major and one minor shall be required. Candidates
may select their minor in another Faculty.
6. (a.) A thesis must be prepared on some approved topic
in the major subject.
(b.) Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be
required.
7. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized
thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of
"Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
8. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar by October 15th. (See schedule of fees.)
Examinations and Advancement
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students,
are held in December and in April. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close
of the examination period. In cases where illness is the pleai
for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be
presented. 238 Faculty op Agriculture
2. In the First and Second years candidates taking a full
course will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain
at least 40 per cent, on each subject and 50 per cent, on the
aggregate. In the Third and Fourth years candidates will not
be considered as having passed unless they obtain at least 50
per cent, on each subject and at least 60 per cent, on all subjects
of the Department in which the student is majoring. Candidates taking less than a full course (15 units) must obtain at
least 50 per cent, on each subject of the First and Second years,
and at least 60 per cent, on each subject of the Third and Fourth
years. Students taking work in the Summer Session will not be
considered as having passed unless they obtain 50 per cent, or
more in each subject.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to
80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations
of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him
supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which
he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such
examinations have been granted.
5. Supplemental examinations will be held in September
and will not be granted at any other time, except by special
permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50
per paper.
6. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees) must be in
the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date
set for the examinations.
7. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental
examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units
of the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination
outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of
Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by
Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty Examinations and Advancement 239
is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause.
8. A student may not continue in a later year any subject
in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from
an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the
Second Year.
9. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher
year may not register as a partial student in respect of the
subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to
repeat his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by
the Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations
in subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class
standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of
the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following
year.
10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or
Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are
outstanding.
12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and,
in this event, students will be required to pass a special
examination in English to be set by the Department of English. 240 Faculty op Agriculture
COURSES IN AGRICULTURE
Department of Agronomy
Professor: P. A. Boving.
Associate Professor: G. G. Moe.
Assistant Professor: D. G. Laird.
Assistant: G. B. Boving.
1. Soil and Soil Fertility.—An examination will be made of
the more important soil types; cultivation, manuring, and rotation of crops will be studied in their relation to soil productivity;
methods of treatment will be observed, and the principles under
lying soil management and improvement will constitute the basis
for subsequent courses in Agronomy.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
First Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. iy2 units.
2. Field Crops.—This course embraces a study of the most
important grain, corn, forage, and root crops. A detailed study
of the crops, in the field and in the laboratory, will supplement
the lecture work in order to give the student a comprehensive
idea, not only of the different phases of crop production, but also
of the relative value of separate specimens and samples.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
First Year. Mr. Moe, Mr. G. B. Boving. iy2 units.
3. Seed Growing.—This course deals with the production
and marketing of vegetable, root, clover, and grass seeds.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. G. B. Boving. iy2 units.
4. Field Crops (Advanced).—Course 4 constitutes a more
detailed study of field crops than was possible in Course 2.
It also embraces special lecture and laboratory work on the
harvesting, threshing, cleaning, storing, and marketing of our
ordinary field crops. The two courses combined will give the
student a more complete understanding of the various factors
bearing upon the production of a first-class article, whether
intended for sale or for feeding. Agronomy 241
One lecture and one laboratory per week. First and Second
Terms, Third Year. Mr. Moe. 2 units.
5. Economics of Crop Production.—This course embraces
a study of the selecting, planning, and operating of a farm.
Various conditions, systems and practices prevailing on the
American Continent and in Europe will be discussed and
compared.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. 1% units.
6. Field-crop Judging. — The judging and handling of
grains, grasses, forage and root crops will be taken up in the
field as well as in the laboratory.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. V/2 units.
7. Soil Management. — Different systems of cultivation,
rotation, manuring and irrigation, as practised in Canada and
elsewhere, will be discussed, and the influence of these factors on
the maintenance or exhaustion of soil fertility will be studied.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. Laird. IV2 units.
8. Plant-breeding. — This course is planned to follow
Biology 2. With this as a basis, the course is designed to illustrate and explain the breeding of field crops.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Terra,
Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. iy2 units.
9. Field Experiments. — The scope, the methods and the
interpretation of field experiments will be discussed, and a study
will be made of the more important results obtained in different
parts of the world.
Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Laird. 1 unit.
10. Thesis. 3 units.
11. Crop Adaptation and Distribution (Crop Ecology).—
The relation of field crops to elevation, climate and soils will be 242 Faculty op Agriculture
studied in order to give the student a comprehensive idea of the
distribution of crops and the adaptation of various types to
different parts of the world.
One lecture per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Moe. y2 unit.
12. Research (Directed). 3 units.
(Not required of Undergraduates.)
13. Soil Bacteriology.—Laboratory and lecture course, in
which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility.
Text: Lohnis and Fred, Agricultural Bacteriology, latest
edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Bact. 1, Agronomy 1. J
Five hours per week. First Term. I .
Mr. Laird. 2 units.
Students majoring in Agronomy are required to work one
summer under the direction of the Department.
Department of Animal Husbandry
Professor: H. M. King.
Assistant Professor: R. L. Davis.
Assistant Professor: H. R. Hare.
Lecturer in Veterinary Science: J. G. Jervis.
1. Market Classes and Grades of Live Stock.—A study of
the characteristics and requirements of the various market classes
and grades of beef cattle, dairy cattle, horses, sheep, swine and
goats.
Texts: Vaughan, Types and Market Classes of Live Stock.
Plumb, Judging Farm Animals.
Three laboratories per week. First Term, First Year.
Mr. King, Mr. Davis, Mr. Hare. iy2 units.
2. Breeds of Cattle. — A study of the origin, history of
development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of
cattle. Students are required to make several trips to leading
herds in the Province. Animal Husbandry 243
Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1.
Three laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year.
Mr. King, Mr. Davis. IV2 units.
3. Breeds of Horses, Sheep, Swine and Goats.—A study of
the origin, history of development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of horses, sheep, swine and goats.
Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1.
Two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year.
Mr. Davis, Mr. King. 1 unit.
4. Live-stock Feeding and Management.—The feeding, care,
and management from birth to maturity of the various types of
live stock.
Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding, abridged
edition.
Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 1.
Three lectures per week. Second Term, First Year.
Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. iy2 units.
5. Advanced Judging.—A continuation of the type of work
represented in the laboratory of Animal Husbandry 2 and 3.
Designed to strengthen Animal Husbandry students in the
selection of herd sires, foundation breeding herds, and in the
building up of superior flocks and herds. Special work in the
fitting and handling of live stock is presented. Students are
required to make several trips to leading herds in the Province.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3.
Three laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Davis, Mr. King. iy2 units.
6. Live-stock Breeding. — A study of the principles of
breeding in their application to live-stock development and improvement.
Text: Rice, Breeding and Improvement of Farm Animals.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3 and Biology 2.
Two lectures per week. Second Term, Third Year.
Mr. Davis. 1 unit. 244 Faculty op Agriculture
7. Herd, Flock and Stud-book Study.—An advanced course
in the study of the principal breeds of live stock, familiarizing
the student with the leading sires, dams, families, and herds
of the various breeds, and the blood lines entering into their
formation. Emphasis will be placed upon a study of pedigrees.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis. iy2 units.
8. Nutrition. — A study of the elements and compounds
important to animal nutrition and their relation to the animal
organism; the digestive system; the digestion, absorption,
assimilation, and disposition of food materials. A study of the
various feedstuffs.
Texts: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding. Armsby,
Animal Nutrition.
Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Davis. 1 unit.
(Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.)
9. Animal Feeding.—The feeding of all classes of live stock,
having distinct regard to the economic problems confronting the
breeder and the producer.
Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding.
Three lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. IV2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
10. Markets and Marketing.—A careful study of the markets with their requirements for live stock and live-stock
products, and the relation which these bear to production.
Marketing of breeding stock.
Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. King. 1 unit.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
11. Thesis. 3 units.
12. Live-stock Practice and Seminar.—Every Animal Husbandry student is required to spend the summer months between Dairying 245
the Third and Fourth Years on an approved live-stock farm and
to present a written report upon his summer's work before
entering upon the Second Term of the Fourth Year.
Open only to students majoring in Animal Husbandry.
A seminar of one hour per week for the special study of
current problems and literature is held. Mr. King. iy2 units.
13. Livestock Farm and Ranch Management.—The management of the range, ranch, and farm for the production of live
stock.
Texts: Potter, Western Live Stock Management. Sampson,
Farm and Range Management.
Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 12.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. King, Mr. Hare. ' iy2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
14. Veterinary Science.—A study of the common diseases
of horses, cattle, sheep, swine and goats; their causes, prevention,
and treatment.
Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1 and 4.
Three lectures per week. First Term, Third Year.
Mr. Jervis. iy2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
15. Research (Directed). 3 units.
(Not required of Undergraduates.)
Department of Dairying
Professor: Wilfrid Sadler.
Associate Professor: N. S. Golding.
Assistant: J. D. Middlemas.
1. Elementary Dairying.—An elementary course of lectures
on the principles underlying the successful practice of dairying.
Laboratory work on the control of milk, the preparation of
dairy products, the judging of the same, and the methods of
testing adopted. 246 Faculty op Agriculture
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Second Year. Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units.
2. Farm Cheese-making. — Principles and practices of
cheese-making, hard-pressed, blue-veined, and soft; the making
of cheese on the farm; a general knowledge required of the principal varieties of each class of cheese, and laboratory practice
in the making of standard varieties.
This course is offered in the Third Year or Fourth Year to
students other than those who propose to major in Dairying.
One lecture and two laboratories per week for one term.
iy2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
3. Dairy Bacteriology.—The bacteriology of milk, and milk
products; sources of bacteria in milk, number and varieties;
influence of time, temperature, etc., on these; methods of culture
and isolation; fermentation of milk, lactic, butyric, peptonizing,
gaseous, ropy, etc.; relation of milk to spread of tuberculosis,
typhoid fever, and other diseases; pasteurization and sterilization of milk; certified milk and bacterial standards applied to
milk; relation of bacteria to cream, butter-making and butter;
control of bacteria in relation to milk and milk products.
Two lectures and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Third Year. Mr. Sadler. 2 units.
4. Creamery Butter-making. — Creamery butter-making-
grading of cream; treatment and preparation of cream for
butter-making; pasteurization; manufacture of creamery butter;
judging, grading, and marketing of butter.
Prerequisite: Dairying 3.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Third Year. Mr. Golding, iy2 units.
5. Market Milk.—The hygienic aspect of milk production;
the bacterial quality of machine-drawn versus hand-drawn milk;
certified milk; handling and management of milk for city consumption; grading of milk on bacterial standards; pasteurization; transportation and distribution of milk; ordinances and Dairying 247
regulations concerning the sale of milk. This course will include
laboratory work in dairy bacteriology, practice in the dairy, and
visits to selected farms and milk distributing depots.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. Sadler, Mr. Golding. iy2 units.
6. Cheese and Cheese-making.—This course deals with the
principles and practices of cheese-making — hard-pressed, blue-
veined, and soft.
Offered to those majoring in Dairying.
Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Fourth Year.
Mr. Golding. 4 units.
7. Dairy Bacteriology. — Qualitative and quantitative bacteriological analysis of market milk, condensed milk, milk
powder, cream, butter, and cheese; bacterial changes in storage
butter; ripening of cheese. Opportunities are presented for
exercising bacterial control of the various processes carried out
in the dairy laboratory.
Offered to those majoring in Dairying.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Sadler. iy2 units.
8. Testing of Milk and Dairy Products. — The testing of
milk, cream, butter, and cheese; the selling of milk and cream
on the butter-fat basis; causes of variation in butter-fat content.
One lecture-laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Golding. y2 unit.
(Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.)
9. Dairy Buildings and Equipment.—Buildings suitable for
handling of milk and manufacturing of dairy products; their
situation, construction, arrangement; equipment of farm dairies,
creameries, and cheese-factories. This course includes detailed
studies of selected buildings.
One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. 1 unit.
(Not offered in 1927-28.) 248 Faculty op Agriculture
10. The Judging and Grading of Milk and Milk Products.—
Offered to students of the Senior Year.
Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units.
(Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.)
11. Thesis. ' 3 units.
12. Research (Directed). 3 units.
(Not required of Undergraduates.)
Department of Horticulture
Professor: F. M. Clement. A
Professor: A. F. Barss.
Assistant Professor: F. E. Buck.
Assistant: John C. Wilcox.
1. Principles of Horticulture. — A study of the principles
involved in the selection, propagation, planting, and general care
of the more important fruits, vegetables, flowers and ornamental
trees and shrubs, with sufficient practice to enable a student to
care for the home plantings.
This course is designed to meet the needs of all students in
Agriculture, giving them a general knowledge of Horticultural
Crops. At the same time the work is fundamental for students
who are planning to take further courses in Horticulture.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Second Year. Mr. Barss, Mr. Buck. iy2 units.
3. Practical Pomology. — A detailed study of the best
methods in Orchard Management with field practice in various
orchard operations, such as planting, pruning, and spraying.
The course also deals with the culture of small fruits.
Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. Barss. 2 units.
4. Plant Propagation and Nursery Practice.—This course
deals with the methods used in propagating plants, including
budding and grafting; and with Commercial Nursery practices.
One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. Buck. 1 unit. Horticulture 249
5. Commercial Pomology.—A study of the problems connected with the handling of fruits and vegetables!—harvesting,
grading, packing, shipping, storing, marketing; packing and
storage houses; marketing associations; costs of production and
marketing.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. iy2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
6. Systematic Pomology.—A course in description, identification, classification, displaying, and judging of fruits. The
course also includes a certain amount of work in Systematic
Olericulture.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Buck, Mr. Barss. iy2 units.
(Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.)
7. Practical Vegetable Gardening.—A study of the problems
connected with the commercial growing of vegetables, including
the selection of a location, soil requirements, fertilizing, irrigating, and special cultural methods for the more important vegetables. This course also deals with the construction of hot-beds,
cold-frames, greenhouses, and their management in the forcing
of vegetable crops.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. iy2 units.
(Not offered in 1927-28.)
8. Special Horticulture.—A course for the study of special
branches of Commercial Horticulture, including the manufacture
of horticultural products, such as canned fruits, dried products,
jams, jellies, and fruit juices.
Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Barss. 1 unit.
(Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.)
9. Horticultural Problems.—An introduction to the study
of problems in Horticulture, including the breeding of Horticultural crops, variety adaptations, and methods of research, 250 Faculty op Agriculture
together with a review of Horticultural investigational work
in other institutions. There will also be practice in outlining
investigations, and in preparing reports.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. V/2 units.
10. Landscape Gardening and Floriculture. — The course
aims to give the student a working knowledge of the selection,
planting and care of ornamental plants—trees, shrubs, and
flowers; with the principles for the improvement of home
grounds, school grounds, city streets, and parks. The course
includes practice in identification of plant materials; also practice in making of planting plans.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. ^ iy2 units.
11. Thesis. 3 units.
12. Research (Directed). 3 units.
(Not required of Undergraduates.)
Department of Poultry Husbandry
Professor: E. A. Lloyd.
Assistant Professor: V. S. Asmundson.
Assistant: W. J. Riley.
1. General.—Fundamentals of poultry-keeping, including
breeds, breeding, judging, selection, culling, feeds, feeding,
incubation, brooding, poultry-house construction, killing, egg-
grading, marketing, sanitation and hygiene, diseases, general
management.
The regular laboratory exercises are supplemented by practice work in the feeding and care of poultry flocks.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term,
Second Year. Mr. Lloyd. IV2 units.
2. Markets and Marketing.—Marketing conditions for poultry products in British Columbia. The relation of the home
market to outside markets. Canadian Egg Marketing Regulations. Provincial Egg Acts and Regulations. Egg-grading, care, Poultry Husbandry 251
packing, storing, selling. Fattening poultry for market; killing,
packing, storing, selling. Production and sale of high-class
breeding stock for local demand and export trade. Advertising.
Principles and practice of marketing, private and co-operative.
Study of prices.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Third Year. Mr. Lloyd. iy2 units.
3. Incubation and Brooding.—Selection and care of hatching
eggs. Shipping hatching eggs. Natural incubation. Artificial
incubation. Types of incubators. Natural brooding. Artificial
brooding. Rearing, including systems of management, housing,
feeding and training chicks. Brooding equipment. Practice in
operating incubators and brooders. ^*
Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1. ^
One lecture and two laboratories and practice per week.
Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units.
4. (a) Breeds and Breeding.—The breeds of poultry; their
history, origin and economic qualities. The principles of
breeding as applied to Poultry Husbandry. Breeding records.
Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1 and Biology 2.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units.
4. (6) Advanced Breeding.—Breeding for egg and meat
production. Statistical study of production records.
Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 4.
One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit.
5. (a) Poultry Management.—Types of poultry farms and
their respective problems. Farm layouts. Economy of investment of capital in land, buildings, stock and equipment.
Efficiency in breeds, maintenance, labor, housing, feeding, production and personnel. Marketing. Farm income, labor income
and profit as based on University survey. Studies of individual
farms for criticism.
One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. V/2 units. 252 Faculty op Agriculture
5. (6) Advanced Farm Management.—Continuation of
Poultry 5, with more detailed study of surveys and cost account
records to determine labor income and profits.. Inventory valuations. Special study of disease problems. Estimates on cost
of developing poultry farms. Efficiency factors. Costs of
production.
One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. ' 1 unit.
6. Diseases, Housing and Hygiene.—Common ailments of
poultry and their treatment. Parasites. Infectious and contagious diseases of poultry and chicks, turkeys, geese and ducks
Autopsies. Dissection. Poultry-house construction, building
sites, types, costs and uses. Yarding. Sanitation and hygiene.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term,
Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units.
7. (a) Feeding Management.—Feeding growing stock,
laying hens, breeding males and females, turkeys, ducks and
geese. Use of lights. Study of standard methods of routine
management.
Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 8.
Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit.
7. (b) Poultry Rations.—Application of the facts revealed
by studies in nutrition to the compounding of rations for
poultry. Study of feed mixtures. Problems and assigned
reading.
Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 7 (a).
One lecture and one laboratory per week.
Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit.
8. Seminar.—Poultry literature. Reports on current events.
Research and experimental problems. Preparation of reports
and bulletins. Export trade. Advertising and other economic
propaganda.
One lecture per week. Three hours practice per week.
Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd. 1 unit. Agricultural Economics 253
9. Judging and Selection.—Judging according to standard.
Changes induced by egg production. Characteristics of layers.
Selection for egg production. Selection for meat production.
Two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year.
Mr. Asmundson. .1 unit.
10. Thesis. 3 Units.
11. Research (Directed). 3 units.
(Not required of Undergraduates.)
AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS
Dean Clement.
A. Farm Organization and Management.—This is a lecture
and laboratory course, based on a detailed study of five hundred
farms in British Columbia, as recorded on the Farm Survey
Sheets.
References and assigned readings.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Fall Term.
The Staff. iy2 units
B. Agricultural Economics and Marketing.—Some applications of the principles of Economics and Marketing to Agriculture. Required of all students in the Occupational Course, but
not open for credit to degree students.
Text: Carver, Elements of Rural Economics, Ginn.
Three lectures per week. Second Term.
Mr. Clement. iy2 units.
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics
as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem, and some special topics, such as the agricultural
surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm
income and the share of agriculture in the national income.
Text: Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from! Grey, Carver,
Nourse, and others.
Three lectures per week.
Mr. Clement. 3 units. 254 Faculty op Agriculture
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to
the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general
principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products
as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements,
co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat,
fruit, and milk in Canada.
Texts: Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers. • Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada. Ryerson
Press, Toronto.
References and assigned readings from Macklin, Hibbard,
Boyle, Benton, and others.
Three lectures per week.
Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Note:—Where courses other than those listed under Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, Poultry
Husbandry and Agricultural Economics are mentioned, the
student will please refer to outlines of courses in Arts and Science
or Applied Science. List op Students 255
LIST OF STUDENTS IN ATTENDANCE, SESSION 1926-27
FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
Fibst Yeak
Full Undergraduates
Name. Home Addren.
Abernethy, E. Frances Vancouver
Ades, Jessie J Vancouver
Adey, Jessie J Sandwick
Alderson, Eva M Vancouver
Alexander, Charles F Vancouver
Alexander, Kenneth F Fernie
Andrews, Herbert Fernie
Arbuthnot, Leland C Vancouver
Archibald, Reginald MacG Vancouver
Armstrong, L. Gwendolyn New Westminster
Arnold, Eleanor Glen North Vancouver
Ashby, Barbara M Vancouver
Asquith, Richard L New Westminster
Austin, Ernest Vancouver
Bailey, Myrtle A. H Vancouver
Baker, Maurice G Vancouver
Baker, Russell Vancouver
Balkwill, Mildred C Vancouver
Ballentine, George Van N Vancouver
Ballentine, Helen M Vancouver
Balneaves, Chrissie J Vancouver
Barnes, Elmer G Vancouver
Barratt, Herbert J Vancouver
Barratt, Philip S Vancouver
Bates, Freda A Gifford
Baynes, George E Vancouver
Beacham, Frances H Vancouver
Beamish, W. Randolph New Westminster
Bell, Helen V Hollybnm
Bennett, Ruth M Vancouver
Best, Vincent G. O Ganges
Bingay, Marjorie W Trail
Birch, Robert H New Westminster
Black, Peter T Prince Rupert
Black, Ross M Kelowna
Booth, Constance M. Vancouver
Boothroyd, Gordon G Surrey Centre
Borthwick, Winifred Vancouver
Bowden, J. Rosina New Westminster
Bowen, Marjorie M Vancouver
Bowering, Fred. N. Vancouver
Bowness, Warren H Cranbrook
Brankin, Gladys M Port Coquitlam
Breger, Bertha M Vancouver
Bridgman, Erica M North Vancouver
Briggs, S. Isabelle Vancouver 256 The University op British Columbia
Name. Home Addreti.
Brock, David H Vancouver
Brookes, Mary Vancouver
Brown Brenton S Vancouver
Brown, Louise D Vancouver
Brown, Mary L Vancouver
Brown, Ralph MacL Vancouver
Brydone-Jack, Margaret A Vancouver
Buckworth, Dorothy G Vancouver
Burchell, William U Vancouver
Burdett, Winnifred Kimberley
Burns, Ronald M Vancouver
Burton, Margaret Mel Vancouver
Cameron, James E Vancouver
Cameron, Manly Vancouver
Campbell, Allan C Vancouver
Campbell, Cherry Stewart
Campbell, J. Kenneth Prince George
Campbell, Marion I Abbotsford
Campbell, Mary E Vancouver
Carre, Stephen N Vancouver
Cather, E. Gwendolyn Vancouver
Chalmers, Thomas M Burnaby
Chambers, Robert C North Vancouver
Chapman, Maxine F Trail
Chapman, Robert J New Westminster
Chenier, M. Josephine Vancouver
Chin, George H Vancouver
Christie, Jean S , New Westminster
Clark, Gordon A. Port Moody
Clayton, John N. C Vancouver
Clifford, Octavia M Vancouver
Clugston, M. Irene Vancouver
Coles, Albert E Vancouver
Colledge, M. Elaine Vancouver
Collier, Sarah I Chilliwack
Collinson, Carl A Lloydminster, Sask.
Conlan. Jack R Vancouver
Cook, Helen A North Vancouver
Coope, Margaret Berkeley, Calif.
Copeland, Van Potter New Westminster
Cornish, Naomi H Hollyburn, W. Van.
Crawford, Elmer J Oyama
Crawford, Muriel M Stewart
Creamer, Wm Burnaby
Creelman, Arthur G. North Vancouver
Creelman, Lyle M Steveston
Creighton, George L. D Vancouver
Crosby, Helen J Vancouver
Cross, Frank New Westminster
Crowe, M. Loraine Vancouver
Cull, F. Edna ... Vancouver
Cupit, Ernest H Vancouver
Dadson, Edith G Vancouver
Darough, Neil W Chilliwack List of Students 257
Name. Home Addret:
Davis, Beatrice E Vancouver
Dawe, Harold J. F New Westminster
Dawson, N. Elliott Vancouver
De Bou, Bernice I Vancouver
Dewar, Dorothy G Revelstoke
Dick, Margaret B Vancouver
Dickie, Frances O Vancouver
Dillabough, Alice E Vancouver
Dobie, C. Jean New Westminster
Dobson, B. Jean L Vancouver
Dobson, Wm. Kenneth A Oyama
Doheny, Marie G. Vancouver
Doherty, Robert S Vancouver
Dow, Marion E Vancouver
Dowler, David R Vancouver
Downing, Dorothy M Vancouver
Duckering, Margaret G Vancouver
Duncan, Campbell Vancouver
Dunham, Burtt Abbotsford
Dunham, Charles B Vancouver
Dunlap, Francis A New Westminster
Elliot, John A. F Savona
English, Lloyd E Vancouver
Etherington, Dorothy E New Westminster
Etter, Georgina M Vancouver
Fairley, J. Jeckell Vancouver
Fawcett, Fairvan C Vancouver
Fenner, J. May Vancouver
Fernlund, Holger B Vancouver
Fisher, Elizabeth M Vancouver
Fisher, J. Frederick Eburne
Fladgate, F. Wm. G Vancouver
Fleck, William J Agassiz
Fletcher, Lucy Vancouver
Follick, Clifton R. Vancouver
Forsyth, Agnes J Vancouver
Fraser, Stewart T Vancouver
Fraser, T. Clyde Vancouver
Freeman, Helen Vancouver
Freeman, Ida C Vancouver
French, Norma E. Princeton
Gale, Myrtle G Vancouver
Gallagher, J. Wilfred Vancouver
Gardner, J. Smith Nakusp
Garratt, H. Jean Vancouver
Garratt, Morley W Vancouver
Gaudin, Melvin L New Westminster
Gaul, Katharine L. C Vancouver
Gavin; Harold D New Westminster
Gavin, Mary F Burnaby
Gilbert, Ernest W Ladner
Gillespie, Charlotte R. L Vancouver
Gilley, H. Frances New Westminster
Gillies, Eleanor M. D Vancouver 258 The University op British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Goard, Dean H Vancouver
Godfrey, Margaret B. Vancouver
Gourlay, Jessie M Vancouver
Govenlock, H. Elizabeth Vancouver
Grant, Donald E. New Westminster
Grant, Jessie M. C Vancouver
Grant, Marion R Vancouver
Gray, Kenneth R Vancouver
Gray, Roland C. V New Westminster
Green, Andrew North Vancouver
Green, Maxwell L New Westminster
Greenwood, F. Marjorie Vancouver
Grimmett, Frederic K Merritt
Grossman, Peter F Chilliwack
Gustafson, Y. Eric Penticton
Hacking, Catherine L Vancouver
Hale, J. Stewart North Vancouver
Hallonguist, Frank W New Westminster
Hamilton, Norval E Vancouver
Hamilton, Rognvald T Vancouver
Hanes, F. E. Evelyn North Vancouver
Hanna, Wm. Clarence E New Westminster
Harbord Harbord, Patrick R. D New Westminster
Hardy, Ella New Westminster
Hardy, Walter T Vancouver
Harris, Irene M West Summerland
Hart, Harold W Vancouver
Harvey, G. Lloyd Vancouver
Harvie, M. Muriel Vancouver
Haslett, Thomas A Ocean Falls
Ha worth, Lilian New Westminster
Helliwell, Hilary R. B Vancouver
Helmer, Cecil D Vancouver
Hemsworth, Frederick J Vancouver
Henderson, E. Ruth Vancouver
Henderson, Gibb G. Vancouver
Henderson, Jean A. B Vancouver
Henderson, Margaret H. T Vancouver
Henderson, Percy H Vancouver
Hill, Dorothy R Vancouver
Hillier, Wm. Vibert Vancouver
Hilton, Freda S Port Alberni
Hodnett, Lisle Vancouver
Holliday, Celia M North Vancouver
Holloway, M. Emily Vancouver
Holmes, A. Constance Vancouver
Holt, Barbara New Westminster
Horn, Howard J Vancouver
Horton, Dorothy A Vancouver
Horton, R. Donald Vancouver
Horton, Ruby J Vancouver
How, L. Kathleen Vancouver
Hudson, Gertrude M Vancouver
Hughes, Kathleen R North Vancouver List op Students 259
Name. Home Addret:
Hughes, Norah L Abbotsford
Ingraham, Kathleen A Vancouver
Inkster, Joseph D Vancouver
Inouye, Kuramitsu Vancouver
Ireland, Elizabeth B. W Vancouver
Irvine, Margaret C New Westminster
Irvine, Margaret S Fernie
Irwin, Wallace S Irwin
Itter, Stuart Vancouver
Jackson, Roscoe A Hollyburn
James, Albert H Vancouver
James, Bessie M Vancouver
Jamieson, Gerald C Vancouver
Jenkins, F. Norman Oyama
Johnson, A. Harry Vancouver
Johnson, Daniel E Ocean Falls
Johnson, Florence B Vancouver
Johnson, James R Revelstoke
Johnson, Thelma H. C Vancouver
Johnston, Annette E Vancouver
Johnstone, Havelock H Rossland
Jones, Charles Vancouver
Jones, F. Oulton Vancouver
Keeling, F. Temple New Westminster
Keenleyside, E. Wm. Irvine Vancouver
Keillor, Dorothy E Vancouver
Kelly, Eric Vancouver
Kennett, William T. E Vancouver
Kershaw, Ernest McD Ladner
Kidd, Kathleen M Burnaby
King, Everett H Burnaby
Kinninmont, Russell J North Vancouver
Knudsen, Catherine M New Westminster
Kokoros, Antonio Vancouver
Kolle, William J. Vancouver
Kuwabara, Hiro Vancouver
Lamb, Margaret B Vancouver
Lambert, Jennie I Vancouver
Lang, George W. Vancouver
Lang, S. Howard Vancouver
Larbalester, Beatrice M New Westminster
Latimer, Edgar C Burnaby
Layman, Donald L Vancouver
Lazarus, Louise J Vancouver
Leach, D. John Vancouver
Leach, Jean F. M Vancouver
Leard, Ralph M Wardner
Leatherdale, Donald A Vancouver
Lehrman, K. Marguerite Vancouver
Leslie, Jean O'Dell Los Angeles, Calif.
Lewis, Dorothy S Vancouver
Linfield, Arthur G Vancouver
Lister, C. Louise Vancouver
Loch, Margaret S Vancouver 260 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Lough, Dallas E Vancouver
Madigan, Stephen E. Vancouver
Mahon, Thelma H. Vancouver
Malcolm, Olive M. C Vancouver
Martin, Kenneth W Vancouver
Mason, Ralph P * Vancouver
Masterson, Robert V New Westminster
Mathers, Alice Vancouver
Matthews, Edith L Grand Forks
Mathews, J. Donald Vancouver
Mayers, E. Wallace New Westminster
Mayers, R. J. Neville Vancouver
Menten, R. Claire New Westminster
Merrin, Violet B Vancouver
Merryfield, Basil Vancouver
Merry weather, Barbara J Vancouver
Miles, L. Chester Vancouver
Millar, Alexander M Vancouver
Millar, Edith K. Vancouver
Millerd, Muriel F Vancouver
Milligan, Annie Ocean Falls
Mitchell, Alexander S Prince Rupert
Mitchell, James A. Wellington
Moffatt, Donald W. Vancouver
Moffatt, Ethel G. Vancouver
Moncrieff, Ann Alice Vancouver
Moncrieff, C. May Vancouver
Monroe, J. Lewis Vancouver
Moore, Alexander L. Vancouver
Moore, Mildred I Vancouver
Moore, Sanderson E Vancouver
Morell, Douglas L Vancouver
Morgan, Edward H. Vancouver
Morris, Rhoda A J. Vancouver
Morrison, Clarke Van Vancouver
Morrison, Malcolm C Vancouver
Mulholland, Georgina R. Vancouver
Muncey, Neenah M , Vancouver
Murray, Mae M. Vancouver
Murray, Walter A Vancouver
McAfee, Jessie A. Georgetown Mills
McAlister, Louise M Vancouver
McCharles, Donalda M Vancouver
McColl, Edythe M North Vancouver
McConnachie, Archibald Vancouver
McConnell, Elsie A. Vancouver
McConnochie, Ralph A. Vancouver
McCormack, D. Gordon New Westminster
McCormick, C. Marjorie K. New Westminster
McCormick, Henrietta I New Westminster
McCreery, Frances E Vancouver
McDiarmid, Donald S Trail
MacDonald, Everett J Vancouver
MacDonald, Helen L. Vancouver List of Students 261
Name. Home Address.
McDonald, M. Frances Vancouver
McDougald, Donald L Vancouver
McDowell, Ethel F Vancouver
McEwen, Enid C New Westminster
McEwen, Theodore S New Westminster
McGougan, Jean North Vancouver
McGregor, Malcolm F Vancouver
Mcintosh, D. Arnold D Vancouver
Macintosh, Jean Vancouver
Mclntyre, Douglas F Vancouver
Maclver, Dorothy Vancouver
McKay, Georgie A Vancouver
McKay, Marjorie Vancouver
McKee, Kenneth M. Vancouver
McKee, M. Ruth Vancouver
McKellar, Andrew Vancouver
McKenzie, Betty C Vancouver
McKenzie, Lillian B Vancouver
McKeown, Olive E New Westminster
Mackillop, Katherine R Vancouver
McKinnon, Gertrude M Vancouver
MacKinnon, Peter E Revelstoke
McKivor, Hazel M Vancouver
McLean, Donald H Vancouver
McLean, Ella E. New Westminster
McLennan, Jack Vancouver
McMillan, Donald C. Vancouver
McMorris, Mary A Vancouver
McMurphy, Jessie M New Westminster
McPherson, Lewis J Port Alberni
McPhillips, Frances M Vancouver
McQuarrie, Mary F. C New Westminster
MacRae, Duncan G Vancouver
McRae, Donalda E Vancouver
McSweyn, E. M. LaNier Vancouver
Neelands, Rosella L Vancouver
Negoro, Tsuyuko Vancouver
Nelsen, Henrietta J Revelstoke
Newberry, John D Vancouver
O'Hagan, Eileen K Vancouver
O'Hagan, James P Vancouver
Olson, Florence C Cassidy
Palmer, V. Elvira Vancouver
Parker, Jack R Vancouver
Parker, John A Vancouver
Patterson, Albert H Britannia Beach
Paul, G. Harold G. Vancouver
Paulding, Harold New Westminster
Peacock, Gardiner New Westminster
Pennington, Harold R. Vancouver
Petrak, Milshie Vancouver
Petrie, Jean E , Vancouver
Phillips, Paul Vancouver
Pigott, Arnold D Vancouver 262 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Pilkington, Roderick A Vancouver
Pollock, Marion C Vancouver
Poole, Irene A Vancouver
Pound, Dorothy R Vancouver
Pretty, Jonathan M Vancouver
Price, Reginald C. New Westminster
Pritchard, Donald L Vancouver
Proctor, Fred T Vancouver
Pugh, Phyllis E Vancouver
Pullinger, Mary E. S Burnaby
Purdy, Kathleen M New Westminster
Rankin, Emma A Vancouver
Read, R. Verne Erie
Reece, Frances C Vancouver
Reeve, Phyllis Vancouver
Reynolds, Frances E Vancouver
Richards, Margaret E Vancouver
Richardson, Jack E Vancouver
Riggs, Margaret I Vancouver
Rigney, Irene B Vancouver
Risk, Sydney P Vancouver
Roberts, Berniece Vancouver
Roberts, Don Wm Vancouver
Robertson, Barbara M Vancouver
Robinson, Bertha M Hollyburn
Robinson, Evelyn M. F Vancouver
Robinson, J. Ripley Vancouver
Robson, Lawrence A. New Westminster
Ross, Kathleen MacK Vancouver
Ross, M. Ruth Vancouver
Rosseau, Ralph H Lynn Creek
Ruark, Ruth C North Bend
Rudkin, Gerard H Landon
Salter, Jean R. G Vancouver
Sanderson, Adrian B Vancouver
Sanderson, Leonard E. W New Westminster
Sanderson, Thomas J New Westminster
Saunders, Milton E Vancouver
Savage, Dorothy E Ladner
Savage, Edna M Vancouver
Savage, Gertrude M Vancouver
Saville, John W Vancouver
Sedgwick, Harvey J Vancouver
Shayler, Stanley V Vancouver
Shewbrooks, B. Eileen West Burnaby
Shore, Julius Vancouver
Short, Nellie B Vancouver
Shortreed, Margaret M Rock Bay
Shuttiewood, K. Estella Vancouver
Siddall, Kathleen Y Ladner
Silbernagel, Benedict L Vancouver
Sinclair, Isabelle T Vancouver
Sinclair, Rosa M. M Vancouver
Smart, George S Cloverdale List of Students 263
Name. Home Address.
Smith, Belva A New Westminster
Smith, Donald S Vancouver
Smith, Grace I Vancouver
Smith, Hilda M New Westminster
Smith, H. Winnifred Vancouver
Smith, Irving C. Vancouver
Smith, Wm. Cameron Vancouver
Smith, Wm. George Vancouver
Smith, William W Ladner
Snell, Jean E. A Vancouver
Solloway, Kathleen P Vancouver
Solly, Ivor H West Summerland
Solly, Nicolas O West Summerland
Speed, Marjorie E. J Victoria
Spencer, Verna E Vancouver
Sproule, Elmin Vancouver
Sproule, Marion A Vancouver
Stanley, Beatrice M Vancouver
Stedman, Cecil K. Vancouver
Steele, Isobel F New Westminster
Stewart, James D Vancouver
Stewart, John M Vancouver
Stewart, Peggy E Vancouver
Stinson, Verna C Vancouver
St. Martin, Clive S Khurda Road, India
Stoddart, James Vancouver
Stoddart, Jean I Vancouver
Stohlberg, Edith M Vancouver
Stone, Harriet L Dawson,
Yukon Territory
St. Pierre, Ella M Vancouver
Strachan, James Fernie
Straight, Harold LeBaron Vancouver
Sutherland, Donald F Vancouver
Sutherland, Helen E Nelson
Swanson, Emma Vancouver
Swanson, Ralph A. Burnaby
Symons, Harold E Vancouver
Tait, Elsie M Vancouver
Taylor, G. Cuthbert Vancouver
Teetzel, Jean Julia Vancouver
Thomas, Melvin A Prince Rupert
Thomas, Olwen E Vancouver
Thompson, G. Morrin Vancouver
Tite, David A Prince Rupert
Tobin, Bernard Vancouver
Todd, Lois Vancouver
Truax, Clarence W Grand Forks
True, Eileen Sointola
Tull, E. Harold Courtenay
Tullett, Alice V Vancouver
Tupper, Margaret L New Westminster
Turnbull, Dorothy W. Vancouver
Tweed, Reginald C. R » Cochrane, Alta. 264 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Underhill, H. Fabian Burnaby
Urie, Agnes W. Vancouver
Waddell, D. Graeme A Vancouver
Walker, Kathleen Vancouver
Walker, Mary B Cumberland
Ward, George J Vancouver
Ward, Kathleen J Vancouver
Webster, Alan Burnaby
Webster, William B Vancouver
Weeks, Samuel B Vancouver
Werts, Frederick R New Westminster
Whipple, Annie A. Vancouver
Whiteford, Florence E Nicola
Whiteside, Elizabeth McC New Westminster
Williams, D. Cameron Vancouver
Williams, Lloyd Kelowna
Willis, Laura H. Vancouver
Wilson, Arthur R Belmont Col. Co., N.S.
Wilson, Ernestena Vancouver
Wilson, Muriel T Vancouver
Wilson, William T. P Vancouver
Winch, Eileen New Westminster
Winter, John H Kelowna
Wong, Wing Y Vancouver
Wood, Berton M Vancouver
Wood, Doris J. M Vancouver
Wood, Ernest A Vancouver
Woodbury, Charles P Vancouver
Woodworth, Jean D Vancouver
Woodworth, Margaret E Vancouver
Wright, Basil O Summerland
Wright, Margaret J Vancouver
Wright, Vernon S Vancouver
Wyllie, Jessie I Vancouver
Yasuda, Toyoyoshi Vancouver
Yip, Kew Dock Vancouver
Yochlowitz, Joseph Vancouver
Young, Allan C. Vancouver
Young, Doris I Vancouver
Young, Eileen F. M Revelstoke
Young, Helen M Vancouver
Conditioned
Acorn, Jessie I. Vancouver
Barclay, Grace Vancouver
Chodat, Henry H Vancouver
Draney, W. F. Campbell Vancouver
Elliott, Dorothy L Vancouver
Grant, Hugh New Westminster
Hager, Alvah R Vancouver
Hardy, Wm. K. F New Westminster
Jamieson, Margaret Vancouver
Johnson, C. Bernard Robson
Kemp, Wm. E. G Northfield Lost of Students 265
Name. Home Address.
Litch, John B Vancouver
Little, Wm. Robert A. Vancouver
MacKenzie, Helen J Vancouver
McLeod, Margaret A Vancouver
O'Connor, Aileen J Britannia Beach
Pinkerton, J. Gordon Vancouver
Rendell, Victoria J Dawson, Y. T.
Rindal, Kaare Vancouver
Robertson, Campbell McL New Westminster
Smith, Norman E Vancouver
Secokd Yeas
Full Undergraduates
Abramson, Nicholas H Vancouver
Adam, Jean H Nanaimo
Almond, Irene Vancouver
Alpen, Robert R. Vancouver
Anderson, O. Elmer Burnaby
Andrew, Jean E Vancouver
Anthony, Alan R Vancouver
Arbuthnot, Eva V Eburne
Bailey, Jean G. H Vancouver
Barr, A. Jean Vancouver
Barton, Mary K Vancouver
Bell, Alice Vancouver
Billings, John MacD Vancouver
Bowen, Dorothy F Vancouver
Brealey, Daisy J Hollyburn
Brennan, Wm. Earle Vancouver
Brooke, Melville C .- Steveston
Brown, Harold MacB Vancouver
Brown, Robert C North Vancouver
Burch, Arthur F Vancouver
Burgess, Thomas E Vancouver
Cameron, Ivan W. Prince Rupert
Carlaw, D. Jeanne Vancouver
Carment, D. Malcolm Vancouver
Carter, Mary J Vancouver
Caufield, Rose F. Fernie
Chandler, Thomas A Vancouver
Chilton, Eleanor G Hollyburn
Christie, Daisy Vancouver
Christison, May H Shawnigan Lake
Clark, Mary E Vancouver
Clark, Norman Cassidy
Clarke, Doris E Vancouver
Cliff, Evelyn E. S Vancouver
Colledge, Thelma M Vancouver
Conklin, James S. A Vancouver
Cole, Irene R Vancouver
Crompton, Doris I Vancouver
Crossman, Margaret L New Westminster
Cruise, M. Evelyn G Vancouver 266 The University op British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Daniels, H. Muriel E Vancouver
Dawson, Lome Trail
Deeks, Dorothy I Vancouver
DesBrisay, Maurice P Vancouver
Dewar, Douglas J Vancouver
Dobson, Lily C Vancouver
Douglas, Elizabeth M Vancouver
Dow, Elizabeth Vancouver
Dowler, Jean M. Vancouver
Eddy, Esther Vancouver
Edwards, Marjorie L Vancouver
England, Arthur W Milestone, Sask.
Farish, Henry G Vancouver
Farris, Ralph K Vancouver
Fennell, Freda M. New Westminster
Fleming, Richard H Victoria
Foote, Wm. Rodgers Kamloops
Fowler, Frances L Riondel
Freeman, Harry Vancouver
Freeman, Phyllis M White Valley, Vernon
Freshwater, Norman G Vancouver
Frost, A. C. Gardner Vancouver
Fuller, Evelyn L Vancouver ,
Fullerton, Harold W Vancouver
Garner, F. O. Roswell Duncan
Genser, Joe Vancouver
George, Mary C Burnaby
Gillespie, F. Margaret Vancouver
Gillespie, Vera I Vancouver
Glasgow, Mary Helen Salmon Arm
Gold, Norman L Vancouver
Grant, Beryl E. L Vancouver
Grant, Margaret I . Vancouver
Green, Kathleen B Vancouver
Griffis, Robert S Vancouver
Gunn, William D New Westminster
Haggerty, Wilmer P Vancouver
Hall, Winifred H Vancouver
Harrell, Milton M Vancouver
Hart, Josephine F. L. Victoria
Healy, Eleanor J Vancouver
Helmer, Dorothy E. Vancouver
Higman, Lois C. Vancouver
Hodgson, Shirley Wm New Westminster
Holland, Virginia C Vancouver
Holyroyd, Nora M Vancouver
Honeyford, Cleon D Vancouver
Horton, Edward Wm Vancouver
Hulbert, John E. B Sardis
Hyndman, Ernest E Vancouver
Jacob, Joshua J. M Jerusalem, Palestine
Jenkins, N. Joyce New Westminster
Johnson, Juliet P Hollyburn
Johnson, Margaret C Vancouver List of Students 267
Name. Home Address.
Kajiyama, Toshio Cumberland
Kay, William Vancouver
Keeling, M. Elizabeth New Westminster
Keenlyside, Robert Wm Vancouver
Killam, Elizabeth D. T Vancouver
King, Norma L Vancouver
Kirk, Marjorie S Vancouver
Kirk, T. Downie Vancouver
Klinck, Ronald W Vancouver
Korenaga, George J Vancouver
Laing, Lionel H Victoria
Lamb, Robert S Vancouver
Lang, Barbara Trail
Lanning, Marjorie G. Vancouver
Lloyd, Alma M Vancouver
Lloyd-Jones, David A Kelowna
Loomer, J. Claire Hedley
Lovitt, Edward H Vancouver
Mahon, Harold S Vancouver
Manson, J. Norman Vancouver
Marshall, H. Borden New Westminster
Mathers, Lillian Vancouver
Mathers, M. Kathleen L Burnaby Lake
Maxwell, Duncan A. Vancouver
Mellish, Ellen F Vancouver ■
Mennie, Jessie R Burnaby
Meredith, J. Laurence R Vancouver
Millar, Helen H Field
Moffat, Margaret E Vancouver
Moloney, Mamie P Vancouver
More, Kenneth R Vancouver
Morgan, John G Vancouver
Mouat, Olivia D. Vancouver
Murphy, Denis W. Vancouver
Murphy, Paul D. Vancouver
Macdonald, David Wm Vancouver
McDonald, Ileen M. L Vancouver
McDonald, Jean G Vancouver
Mclnnes, M. J. Vera North Bulkley
Mcintosh, Irene S Vancouver
McKay, Jean I New Westminster
MacKay, Ronald D Vancouver
McKinnell, Gwendolyn M Vancouver
Maclean, Donald N Vancouver
McPhail, Murchie K New Westminster
McRae, Alida B Vancouver
McTavish, Constance C. Vancouver
Nicholson, Howard G. Vancouver
Nordberg, Inga Vancouver
Oldfield, Frederick A Vancouver
O'Neil, Margaret Vancouver
Ormsby, Margaret A Vernon
Oulton, Reta W. Penticton
Owen-Jones, E. E. Doanie Vancouver 268 The University of British Columbia
Nam*. Home Address.
Parr, A. Paul New Westminster
Partridge, E. Douglas Cumberland
Patterson, Dorothy J Vancouver
Pearce, Denis W Vancouver
Pendray, Gladys I Vancouver
Poole, Albert R Port Hammond
Porteous, Diana Vancouver
Punter, Eveline T. V. M Vancouver
Reed, Helen J Penticton
Rees, Lloyd E New Westminster
Reid, John S New Westminster
Reid, Harold A Vancouver
Ricketts, Mary D Vancouver
Riggs, A. Eleanor C. Vancouver
Ripstein, Reitta Vancouver
Robarts, Norma V Vancouver
Rogers, David D. MacN Sullivan
Ross, Beatrice V. G Vancouver
Ross, Geraldine W. Vancouver
Rouvier, Frank E Nanaimo
Rowland, Greville J Vancouver
Saiga, Sakaru Vancouver
Sanders, Frederick H Esquimau
Scott, Archibald O Vancouver
Seed, Harry J Vancouver
Simpkins, E. Grace Vancouver
Sinclair, Margaret M Vancouver
Smith, Helen E Eburne
Sparks, Jack Vancouver
Speck, S. Lloyd New Westminster
Stangland, Luella M New Westminster
Steele, David A Vancouver
Stevens, Marjory G Vancouver
Sturdy, Florence MacD Vancouver
Sutton, Arthur . Vancouver
Switzer, J. Gordon North Vancouver
Tamura, Miyoko Port Haney
Taylor, Murray N Kelowna
Taylor, Patrick S Kelowna
Teetzel, Grace E Vancouver
Thompson, Marguerite A Ocean Falls
Thurston, Kenneth T Port Moody
Todd, Alan L Vancouver
Todd, J. Ronald Vancouver
Tolmie, John R Vancouver
Trent, G. D. John Vancouver
Unsworth, Edith Vancouver
Watson, Henry T Cumberland
Watts, Mary H Vernon
Whitaker, A. Geraldine Vancouver
White, Alice M. G Vancouver
Wilson, Reginald A. Vancouver
Wilson, Ruth Vancouver
York, Gladys Abbotsford List of Students 269
Conditioned
Name. Home Address.
Bailey, Dora M. Parksville, V. I.
Bailey, Doris J Vancouver
Baker, H. Gordon Vancouver
Bennett, Thomas E North Vancouver
Bolton, Lorraine DeH Vancouver
Bowering, E. William Vancouver
Burdett, Mildred E Kimberley
Carl, G. Clifford Vancouver
Carrick, R. Bruce Vancouver
Connor, Earle C Vancouver
Davis, A Iola Vancouver
Estabrook, Alan D Vancouver
Evans, George E Wellington
Gordon, Frayne G Vancouver
Gordon, J. Eleanor C Vancouver
Howarth, Harry Vancouver
Hundal, Teja Singh Vancouver
Jackson, Lylian G. Cranbrook
Jackson, Suzanne C Vancouver
King, Harold F. A. Vancouver
Kwan, Diamond Vancouver
Lazarus, Bernard H Vancouver
Lucas, Charles F Burnaby
Madeley, Frances E Vancouver
Millar, M. Stanley Vancouver
Morrison, M. Mackenzie Vancouver
Murray, John V Nanaimo
McDonald, Margaret C. C Vancouver
Mcintosh, Veronica A. Vancouver
Mackenzie, Hazel M Vancouver
McKeown, Harry L Vancouver
McPhee, Muriel I Courtenay
McSweyn, Edith L. Vancouver
Nakano, Thomas T Cumberland
Plommer, John W Vancouver
Rae, G. Gordon Vancouver
Runge, Francis C Vancouver
Ryall, Grace A Nanaimo
Shields, Gordon J. Vancouver
Sparling, James F Port Hammond
Stevens, Gerald B.'H Portland, Ore.
Stewart, Kenny N Fernie
Stewart, Vernard L Vancouver
Taylor, James A Cranbrook
Waterfield, Jean K. M Nakusp
Webster, Katharyn I Vancouver
White, H. Edward Vancouver
White, Oscar A New Westminster 270 The University op British Columbia
Third Year
Full Undergraduates
Name. Home Address.
Allan, Donald S Vancouver
Allan, Kathleen Vancouver
Ayton, Ernest R Victoria
Baird, Kathleen P Vancouver
Bamber, Irene Vancouver
Barnett, Thomas Vancouver
Barr, Bruce A Hatzic
Beattie, Arthur H Vancouver
Berry, Ethel Vancouver
Brown, Harry L Vancouver
Brown, J. Everett Victoria
Brown, William MacB Vancouver
Bulger, Russell J. Prince Rupert
Bull, Ernest B Vancouver
Burritt, Flora MacD. Vancouver
Burton, Helen J. M Vancouver
Butler, Francis A New Westminster
Cameron, Eugene F ; Vancouver
Carter, Elizabeth B Vancouver
Cassidy, Florence E. Vancouver
Clarke, Sidney V Vancouver
Cole, Mary R Vancouver
Cornish, Olive G Vancouver
Craig, L. Margaret Vancouver
Currie, John H Vancouver
Davidson, George F Vancouver
DeCew, Dorothy M Vancouver
Dickson, George B Victoria
Donley, Wilfred G New Westminster
Douglass, Isobel G L. .J Vancouver
Duff ell, Stanley Vancouver
Dyer, Eleanor G Vancouver
Elliott, Philip L Vancouver
Estey, Margaret J. Vancouver
Farris, Donald Vancouver
Fitzpatrick, Dudley M Vernon
Fraser, James A Vancouver
Frith, Mary K Vancouver
Gammie, Margaret H Vancouver
Gardiner, P. Victoria Victoria
Gibbs, Enid A Vancouver
Gould, Charles E. G Vancouver
Graham, Mona N. Vancouver
Greenlees, Margaret M Vancouver
Greig, Margaret L Vancouver
Groves, Elizabeth A Vancouver
Gwyer, Patricia E. K Penticton
Haddock, Norah Vancouver
Hallonquist, Earland G New Westminster
Hatfield, Harley R Penticton
Hedley, Isabel B Victoria
Hendry, Harry A Dundas, Ontario List of Students 271
Name. Home Address.
Heritage, Oliver W Victoria
Hill, Vernon Reid Vancouver
Hillas, Gertrude Vancouver
Hipperson, Dorothy C Nelson
Hogg, Robert Wm Vancouver
Hornsby, Ruth M Prince George
How, Helen J Vancouver
Hudson, Vivienne G Vancouver
Jackson, Wilfrid A Vancouver
James, Ralph D Vancouver
Kask, Jack L Vancouver
Kelly, Gordon E. Silverton
Kendall, Elizabeth Van H Vancouver
Kennedy, Dorothy N Vancouver
Kerlin, Donald E Vancouver
Kerr, Ruby E Vancouver
Lamb, Helen A Vancpuver
Lane, Joseph H. Nanaimo
Lane, Mary E New Westminster
Law, Margaret J Sidney
Lee, Gerald H Bonnington Falls
Leeming, H. Hope Victoria
Logie, Russell M Vancouver
Lucas, Verna Z Vancouver
Lyons, Hermiena M. , Penticton
Mann, Doris E New Westminster
Marshall, M. Alexander Summerland
Masterson, William J New Westminster
Matheson, Helen D Vancouver
Matheson, Jean U New Westminster
Matheson, Priscilla L Penticton
Mellor, Margaret B Victoria
Milley, Elva M Vancouver
Mitchell, H. Inez Victoria
Munro, Ferdinand L Vancouver
Murphy, Lorna M Vancouver
Musgrave, Gwendolyn M Kelowna
McAlpine, Gladys C North Vancouver
McBain, Wilberta J Vancouver
McCharles, John A Vancouver
McDonald, L. Dorothy Vancouver
MacDonald, Margaret C. ... i Vancouver
MacDonald, Norman D. New Westminster
Maclnnes, Wm. Edmund Vancouver
Maclver, Dolina C Vancouver
McKay, Dorothy C New Westminster
MacKay, Muriel A Vancouver
McLaughlin, Grace V Vancouver
MacLean, Edwin U. Vancouver
McLennan, Edna C Vancouver
McLuckie, Kathleen L. Vancouver
McMillan, John A Vancouver
McPhee, Angus L. Vancouver
McQuarrie, George R New Westminster 272 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Macqueen, M. Evelyn Victoria
McWilliams, Harold G Vancouver
_ Neill, Ruth A. Vancouver
' Nicol, Grace AM Vancouver
Noble, Kenneth F Vancouver
Noble, Robertson D'O Vancouver
Nordberg, Elsie Vancouver
Northey, Helen G. Vancouver
Oberg, Kalervo Tofino
Oswald, Drummond W New Westminster
Paterson, Ethylwin A Vancouver
Patrick, Wm. Beverly Vancouver
Petrie, Robert M. Victoria
Pilkington, Francis C Vancouver
Pollock, Mary E Vancouver
Poole, F. Abner Port Hammond
Ralph, Kathleen M Vancouver
Reid, Marjorie S Vancouver
Reid, Wm. Tennant Grand Forks
Robertson, Muriel A Vancouver
Ross, Lucy K. Vancouver
Ruttan, Beatrice M Victoria
Salisbury, Dorothy E Vancouver
Skelton, Jean W. Victoria
Smith, Margaret S Vancouver
Simpson, Samuel L Massett
Sostad, Odin S Vancouver
Spencer, Myrtle A. Vancouver
Starr, Jean C Vancouver
Stevenson, Alan M. North Vancouver
Stewart, C. Jean Crescent
Stusser, Max Vancouver
Sugarman, Howard W. Vancouver
Sugarman, Ruth A. ~^. Vancouver
Swanson, Gladys E Vancouver
Swanson, John D Vancouver
Swanson, Marion L. Burnaby
Taylor, Annie New Westminster
Taylor, Grace E. Vancouver
Taylor, William H. Vancouver
Telford, Douglas Vancouver
Thompson, G. Hester Cranbrook
Thomson, Margaret M. Vancouver
Thomson, William E Vancouver
Tolmie, M. K. Jean Vancouver
Tufts, Evelyn E Vancouver
Turpin, William R. Vancouver
Vosper, V. Lorine Vancouver
Waddington, Guy Victoria
Washington, Norma R. Vancouver
Watson, Neill McK Vancouver
Weaver, Alice L Vancouver
White, Helen A Vancouver
Whiteley, Albert S Victoria List op Students 273
Name. Home Address.
Williams, John H Kelowna
Williamson, Marien A Vancouver
Wilson, Jean K Cranbrook
Wodlinger, David B Vancouver
Woods, Doris J Vancouver
Woodworth, Hugh MacC Vancouver
Wright, Robert H Vancouver
Yerburgh, Richard E. M Victoria
Conditioned
Bride, William W West Vancouver
Bryson, L. Elmer New Westminster
Buckley, L. Mason Vancouver
Corlette, Anita M Vancouver
Crawford, Alan M Vancouver
Davies, Dermot A. Vancouver
Delbridge, Clayton Vancouver
Eaton, George H Vancouver
Gillespie, Gordon D Vancouver
Hurst, Flora E. Vancouver
Litch, Edith S Vancouver
McFarlane, Meredith M Vancouver
Newall, Nathan Vancouver
Osterhout, Victor H Vancouver
Robinson, Audrey Vancouver
Robson, Annie O Vancouver
Thompson, Alfi eda E Vancouver
Foubth Year
Full Undergraduates
Allen, J. Stanley Naramata
Almond, Blanche Vancouver
Bailey, Albert E Victoria
Ballard, Ernest R Vancouver
Berry, Anne B Langley Prairie
Black, Albert E New Westminster
Black, Bishop Vancouver
Black, Mary L New Westminster
Black, R. May Vancouver
Blatchford, Annie Vancouver
Boyes, Winifred E Vancouver
Brown, Dorothy E Vancouver
Brown, Norman Vancouver
Buckingham, William N Vancouver
Bumstead, V. Grace Vancouver
Burton, John S Vancouver
Calvert, Donald E Kaslo
Cameron, Maxwell A. Nelson
Cameron, Wm. Murray Vancouver
Chislett, Charlotte Vancouver
Clegg, E. Beatrix Vancouver
Cleveland, Hester C Victoria 274 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Coade, Lillian M Vancouver
Coles, Hilda C Vancouver
Coombe, Dorothy L Vancouver
Cottingham, Mollie E Vancouver
Crickmay, Geoffrey W North Vancouver
Dalrymple, Thomas Vancouver
Dee, Henry D Victoria
Denman, Ester O'D Vancouver
Dick, R. Norman Britannia Mines
Dowsley, Gertrude O Vancouver
Duncan, James D Vancouver
Dwinnell, Edith L Vancouver
Elliott, Frank Wm Vancouver
Farris, Katherine H Vancouver
Fordyce-Clark, H. Eustace Vancouver
Fraser, Jean H Vancouver
Freeborn, Grace M Vancouver
French, Joan Vancouver
Fugler, M. Ethel Vancouver
Fullerton, Wm. Evan Vancouver
Galbraith, Gladys E Vancouver
Gillespie, Robert M Vancouver
Gilley, Jean R. D New Westminster
Grantham, Herbert H Vancouver
Gretton, Ronald H New Westminster
Groves, Kenneth P Vancouver
Harding, Cora L Vancouver
Hemsworth, Phyllis M Vancouver
Hill, Evelyn M Vancouver
Hockin, John MacG Vancouver
Holland, F. Jean Vancouver
Hood, Orlo McG Vancouver
Hope, Grace E Vancouver
Howay, Undine L New Westminster
Hurry, Margaret I Vancouver
Ingledew, Wm. Edward Vancouver
Johnston, Frederick B Vancouver
Johnston, Mary H Vancouver
Keillor, Margaret G Vancouver
Kerr, Ida M Vancouver
Kilpatrick, M. Elspeth Vancouver
King, Hubert B Vancouver
Lam, George Vancouver
Lamb, Wm. Kaye Cloverdale
Lamont, Donald MacK Vancouver
Lamont, K. Mary Vancouver
Leigh, Morton D Revelstoke
Mattlce, Clarence R Keremeos
Meagher, John F Nelson
Millward, Louis G Vancouver
Morell, A. Ernest Vancouver
Morrison, Edmund Vancouver
Morrison, Margaret G Vancouver
Morriss, Mary R Vancouver List of Students 275
Name. Home Address.
Mottley, Charles M Vancouver
Mulhern, Edmond F Vancouver
Munro, Hector G Vancouver
Musgrave, Jean I Vancouver
MacDonald, Jessie J New Westminster
McIntosh, Josephine H Simoom Sound
Mackenzie, Anne Vancouver
MacKenzie, L. Margaret New Westminster
MacKenzie, Henriette D Vancouver
McKie, Archibald Vancouver
McLean, J. Beattie Vancouver
McMeans, Beatrice K Vancouver
MacNeill, Lome C Vancouver
McQuarrie, Clare N Vancouver
MacTavish, Isabelle G Vancouver
Newby, Cecil D Sardis
Nixon, Myrtle Vancouver
Orr, Mildred C Vancouver
Partington, Dorothy West Vancouver
Parton, Marion F Vancouver
Patten, Charles G Armstrong
Peck, Helen T Vancouver
Pettapiece, Edna L Vancouver
Phillips, George L Vancouver
Piggott, Eleanora Armstrong
Pillsbury, Richard W Prince Rupert
Porter, Ida S Hollyburn
Pumphrey, K. Avis Vancouver
Ralph, Isobel Vancouver
Rankin, Margaret J Vancouver
Reid, Elsie M Vancouver
Reid, Katharine O. M New Westminster
Riddell, J. Marie Vancouver
Ripstein, Horace R Vancouver
Roberts, Marion O Vancouver
Robertson, Mary S Vancouver
Robinson, G. Russell Vancouver
Robinson, Lillian A Vancouver
Russell, Dorothy B Vancouver
Selwood, Pierce W West Vancouver
Shakespeare, Jack S North Vancouver
Sheridan, Richard H Vancouver
Smith, Harold D Vancouver
Stanley, John New Westminster
St. Denis, Frederic G Vancouver
Stevens, Francis H Vancouver
Stevenson, M. Ian Vancouver
Stewart, Jean E Vancouver
Stocks, George H Vancouver
Strauss, A. Donalda Vancouver
Streight, H. R. Lyle New Westminster
Swanson, Violet M Vancouver
Thorpe, Robert S Victoria
Tutill, Douglas Merritt 276 The University op British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Underhill, H. Margaretta New Westminster
Wagenhauser, Muriel E Princeton
Wagg, E. Blanche Vancouver
Walker, Day Vancouver
Walmsley, Sheridan E New Westminster
Walsh, Clara M Vancouver
Warden, David C Vancouver
Wellington, Beatrice M Barnet
Whaun, Moore Sun-Ning, China
Wilkinson, John H Vancouver
Wilkinson, Margery H Vancouver
Winter, Edyth W Vancouver
Woodworth, Charles A Vancouver
Conditioned
Allan, Dalton D Vancouver
Boyden, Ashley W Victoria
Christie, William H Victoria
Guernsey, Elizabeth Vancouver
Howlett, Leslie E Victoria
McDiarmid, Margaret A Ladner
Stedman, Ralph E Vancouver
Wells, Harry N Vancouver
Wilson, Isabel A Vancouver
Wright, Max H. C North Vancouver
Partial
Aalbersberg, Willem J. G Vancouver
Alihan, Milla Vancouver
Argue, Charles W Vancouver
Bell-Irving, Dorothy Vancouver
Berlet, Roy E Vancouver
Black, Roger J. W Vancouver
Brooks, Leslie D. G. Vancouver
Bryson, Margaret A Ashcroft
Callan, Lawrence Vancouver
Cameron, Elizabeth V Vancouver
Camozzi, R. Oliver Blaine, Wash.
Cunningham, Frederick H Burnaby
Dial, Puran Singh Punjab, India
Dobson, Herbert E Vancouver
Edwards, Byron Vancouver
Elson, Robert T. Vancouver
Evans, Maxwell Vancouver
Fournier, Frank L Vancouver
Fowler, Earle L Robson
Galbraith, Helen K Vancouver
Hale, Agnes Capilano
Harkness, John A. C, Burnaby
Harrison, Rupert N Ganges Harbour
Hay, Letitia A Vancouver List of Students 277
Name. Home Address.
Keeling, Patrick H North Lonsdale
Kilpatrick, Heather Vancouver
Knox, George A. Vancouver
Lang, Arthur H Vernon
Manery, Frederick S. Penticton
Marrion, R. Francis C Vancouver
Maxwell, John A Vancouver
Mito, Kendo Vancouver
Moscrop, Harold J Vancouver
McCutcheon, James C Victoria
Macdonald, Ruth E Vancouver
McGill, Esther M Vancouver
McGugan, Donald McP Vancouver
MacKenzie, Donald Vancouver
McLennan, Reid L Prince Rupert
McSweyn, Maxine M. M Vancouver
Nash, Everard T. W Vancouver
Osterland, Audrey E Vancouver
Phillips, R. Gaundry Vancouver
Stephens, Harriette G Vancouver
Smith, Edna Vancouver
Thomas, Margaret J Vancouver
Thorpe, C. Crews Vancouver
Vike, Karl H Vancouver
Wilson, F. Lloyd Vancouver
Wiser, Virginia J Texas, U.S.A.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
^ First Year
Full Undergraduates
Abernethy, Emerson Vancouver
Adam, Ian MacLean Vancouver
Allardyce, V. Fraser Vancouver
Andersen, George C Vancouver
Berto, Thomas V Vancouver
Bews, Kenneth F New Westminster
Buckland, Francis C Vancouver
Cross, Gordon P Lynn Creek
Cruise, K. Albert Vancouver
Davis, Harry V Revelstoke
Deans, Charles W Victoria
Edwards, Howard I. Moosomin, Sask.
Emery, Philip C. B New Westminster
Fraser, W. A. Schubert Victoria
Fyfe, Kenneth R Vancouver
Garcha, Hazara Singh Punjab, India
Graham, Roy Langley Prairie
Hadwin, Thomas F Vancouver
Halley, J. Kenneth Sandal, Salt Spring Isl.
Harrower, George A New Westminster
Hill, Henry L Vancouver
Holland, Stuart S Vancouver
Kingsberry, John Victoria
Lazorek, William Anyox 278 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Leask, John R Cranbrook
Legg, Maxwell New Westminster
Lewis, Frank A Kelowna
Locke, C. William E Victoria
Lunn, Edward 0 Hollyburn
Madeley, Wm. Arthur Vancouver
Mar, Teh-Chien Foochow, China
Matheson, Donald N Prince Rupert
Matheson, William M Vancouver
Mathews, L. Gerard Vancouver
McAllister, Kenneth Victoria
McCallum, John L. G Grand Forks
Macdonald, Alan J Vancouver
McKechnie, Neil D New Westminster
Nixon, George R. W. Vancouver
Pike, James A Vancouver
Polley, J. Clifford Vancouver
Pradolini, Hugo Revelstoke
Rayner, G. Eric Naramata
Rhodes, Audsley V Victoria
Ridington, Bernard C Vancouver
Roberts, James C Cranbrook
Scott, Norman V Vancouver
Selby, William R Kimberley
Shiels, Thomas Vancouver
Smith, Robert H Victoria
Swanson, Jack R Vancouver
Taylor, Reginald M ".... Vancouver
Thornber, William Summerland
Towgood, Thomas S Oyama
Turnbull, Charles F Vancouver
Unsworth, Arthur Vancouver
Wainman, William Vernon
Watson, Howard D Vancouver
Willis, Philip E Victoria
Woo, Chong W New Westminster
Woodhouse, Albert F Vernon
Woodland, Harold E Grand Forks
Conditioned
Abraham, Francis J. Vancouver
Bayley, Charles M Vancouver
Chapman, Ray E Vancouver
Craster, James E Vernon
Cunliffe, Jack A Vancouver
Madsen, Christy Vancouver
Nelems, Harry E Chilliwack
Parmley, Thomas F Penticton
Phillips, John P Victoria
Phillips, Richard A Victoria
Sohi, Budh Singh Punjab, India
Trant, Geoffrey A. Vancouver
Vaughan, Aubrey W Vancouver
Wilson, Norman O Vancouver
Wong, Charles Vancouver List of Students 279
Second Year
Full Undergraduates
Name. Home Address.
Baker, John A Eburne
Berquist, Rupert A Vancouver
Bishop, Joseph W Vancouver
Blackett, Harold W Victoria
Canfield, Orra W New Westminster
Cornish, Charles R Vancouver
Duckering, Charles E Vancouver
Emery, Donald J New Westminster
Gormely, Marcus W Vancouver
Graham, Leslie W Vancouver
Grant, Wylie S Victoria
Hall, Wilfred N Vancouver
Heelas, John C. Vancouver
Hubner, Rudolph Trail
Hunt, Basil G. North Vancouver
Jagger, Albert E Vancouver
Leek, Walter E Vancouver
Legg, John H New Westminster
Lord, Clifford S New Westminster
Morrison, Robert L Vancouver
McDonald, Walter V Vancouver
Ogawa, Thomas T Vancouver
Peebles, Archie Vancouver
Pollard, William F. A Victoria
Richmond, W. Osborn Chilliwack
Rudnicki, Alois H Fernie
Sargent, Hartley Victoria
Stanley, Thomas R Vancouver
Stevenson, John S Vancouver
Todd, Eric E Vancouver
Todd, Harold J Victoria
Turnbull, Thomas A Vancouver
Wallis, John C Britannia Mines
Warden, Thomas Vancouver
Wilson, George H Vancouver
Workman, William R Fernie
Conditioned
Bebb, Elon Fernie
Blankenbach, William W Victoria
Carpenter, R. Burton Vancouver
Cornwall, George L Vancouver
Curtis, James D Vancouver
Dhami, Bhagat Singh Punjab, India
Foerster, Fred S. Vancouver
Hadgkiss, James Vancouver
Horwood, H. Clare Kingston, Ontario
Macdonald, John E Vancouver
McKeever, James L Penticton
McLean, Alexander Vancouver
Robertson, Francis McG North Vancouver
Swift, William A Penticton
Thompson, George Vancouver 280 The University of British Columbia
Third Year
Full Undergraduates
Name. Home Address.
Chemical Engineering
Thomson, W. Gregg Vancouver
McDiarmid, Ralph G. North Vancouver
Civil Engineering
Bell, Douglas E Vancouver
Logan, Gordon Van E Vancouver
Marin, Joseph Vancouver
Morris, Wilfred H Vancouver
McQuarrie, Hector N North Vancouver
Stewartson, Alan New Westminster
Sutherland, James B Vancouver
Ei.ectb.tcai, Engineering
Duncan, Jack D Vancouver
Harvie, Ralph A Vancouver
Mooyboer, A. Peter Grand Forks
Newmarch, Gerald Vancouver
Tokunaga, Tadashi Vancouver
Tupper, Bert R Vancouver
Forest Engineering
Hodgins, Hugh J. Vancouver
Geological Engineering
Goronson, Edwin A New Westminster
Mechanical Engineering
Sinclair, James Vancouver
Mining Engineering
Farrington, John L Vancouver
Gibbs, Thomas C Vancouver
Conditioned
Electrical Engineering
Crawford, Lionel G Merritt
Forest Engineering
Touzeau, Ernest G Vancouver
Mechanical Engineering
Parsons, Harold E Vancouver
Metallurgical Engineering
Gibson, Swanston Vancouver
Fourth Year
Full Undergraduates
Chemical Engineering
Brown, Rex L Vancouver
Hartley, James D Victoria
Nunn, Edward H Vancouver List of Students 281
Name Home Address.
Civil Engineering
Bloom, Jason Vancouver
Gordon, Arthur I. E Skidegate
Larsen, Arthur G. Vancouver
Oliver, John C Vancouver
Phillips, Wilfred J London, England
Rothwell, James M Vancouver
Todd, Robert L. Vancouver
Electrical Engineering
Clement, Bruce D Vancouver
Gale, Stanley C Vancouver
Gill, Otto H Cranbrook
Manson, Harold E Hatzic
Mathews, John T Vancouver
Mathewson, Philip E Essondale
Mosher, Harry E North Vancouver
North, J. Terry Vancouver
Pottinger, Alexander Vancouver
Wainman, Philip R Vernon
Forest Engineering
Elley, Frederick W. Fernie
Liersch, John E North Vancouver
Miller, George W. North Vancouver
Geological Engineering
Kidd, Desmond F Vancouver
Lees, Everett J. Vancouver
Mechanical Engineering
Bishop, Charles B Vancouver
D'Aoust, J. Gilbert Vancouver
Leek, Charles W Vancouver
Millar, James W Field
Metallurgical Engineering
Farrar, Ben K. Vicosa
Mining Engineering
Arnold, Theodore E Vancouver
Maclean, Hugh A Vancouver
Richmond, Alexander M Vancouver
Shannon, Jack D Vancouver
Stevenson, C. Douglas Victoria
Waddington, George W. Merritt
Conditioned
Geological Engineering
Pearcey, John G. Vancouver
Partial
Andresen, Sigurd Vancouver
Annand, Roy F New Westminster
Astell, Joseph J Vancouver
Barclay, Guy Lumby 282 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Barnsley, Frank R Vancouver
Carver, Stanley C Victoria
Crickmay, James L North Vancouver
Dalton, John North Vancouver
Dykstra, Anton A. Vancouver
Emery, Geoffrey B New Westminster
Fraser, James S. Chisholm Victoria
Gustafson, Carl E Vancouver
Hay, Edward C Vancouver
Jones, Allan J Nanaimo
McDonald, Hugh J Vancouver
Pretious, Edward S Hollyburn
Somerton, Thomas W Prince George
Sparks, Wilbur H Vancouver
Young, Robert B Compeer, Alta.
NURSING
First Year
Full Undergraduates
Elliott, Ethel L. . Vancouver
Hillas, Hedwig Vancouver
Homfray, Geraldine E Kamloops
MacDonald, Margaret I Vancouver
Mclntyre, Kathleen V Revelstoke
MacKenzie, Dorothy E New Westminster
O'Neill, Dorothy E Vancouver
Reid, Katherine B Vancouver
Smith, Muriel R Vancouver
Tisdall, Sheila M Duncan
Young, M. Fyvie H Victoria
^^ Second Year
Full Undergraduates
Armstrong, Mary Vancouver
Cardwell, Merion T Vancouver
McPhee, Mary Vancouver
Ross, Mary Victoria
Conditioned
Henderson, Isobel M Vancouver
Third Year
Full Undergraduates
Anderton, Evelyn Cranbrook
Aske, Jessie Vancouver
Dorsett, Margaret Vancouver
Henderson, Mary Vancouver
Tisdall, Edith W Vancouver
Upshall, Edna M Vancouver List of Students 283
Fourth Year
Full Undergraduates
Name. Home Address.
Harvey, Myrtle E Kamloops
Johnston, Mabel Vancouver
MacKechnie, Flora Vancouver
Yates, Annie Vancouver
Fifth Year
Full Undergraduates
Higgs, Nora L Albert Head, V.I.
Lyne, Frances E Esquimau
Olmstead, Dorothy G Vancouver
Reilly, Ruby R Vancouver
Stoddart, Elizabeth Clinton
Partial
Hilton, Grace I Vancouver
Steves, Martha W Steveston
Sutherland, Margaret F Vancouver
Swencisky, Victoria M New Westminster
FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE
Fibst Year
Full Undergraduates
Aspinall, Thomas E fi. im Fauquier
Christmas, Irene M Cloverdale
DesBrisay, Eileen Vancouver
Forsyth, Ralfe M Vancouver
Gilmore, Edward J Steveston
Grauer, Frederick Wm Vancouver
Morris, John R Vancouver
Nesbitt, Richard T New Westminster
Roberts, Bertram B New Westminster
Spilsbury, Richard H North Vancouver
Thompson, Lloyd B Vancouver
Utsumi, Kiku Mission City
Conditioned
Currie, Lyall A. Cloverdale
Koga, Vernon Vancouver
Preston, Shirley G Vanderhoof
Partial
Second Year
Full Undergraduates
Black, Lindsay McL Vancouver
Ink, Joseph C Nelson
Lott, Thomas B Kamloops
Odium, Roger M Vancouver
Swanson, Jack R Vancouver
Waterfield, Donald C Nakusp 284 The University op British Columbia
Conditioned
Name. Home Address.
Brooke, Ralph E Salmon Arm
Charlton, Gerald Wm Port Haney
Sutherland, Donald Vancouver
Yarwood, Cecil E, Huntingdon
Third Year
Full Undergraduates
Asher, Charles R. Vancouver
Brown, William C Hammond
Moffatt, Kenneth F Vernon
Thorneloe, Keith Vancouver
Conditioned
Boyes, Edgar D .* Vancouver
Fourth Year
Full Undergraduates
Berry, Jack C Langley Prairie
Mallory, Lester DeW. Sardis
Matthews, Willoughby W. Westholme, V.I.
Milne, Helen I. ...: Vancouver
Ross, Herbert H Vancouver
Partial
Bowman, Sydney J Vancouver
Buenzly, Alphonse Zuerich 5, Switzerland
Dekema, Wouter Vancouver
Eden, A. Harold Vancouver
Luyat, Gabriel A Agassiz
Mclntyre, Douglas C Vancouver
McKay, Leslie W Vancouver
MacKenzie, C. Duncan New Westminster
MacKenzie, J. Cameron New Westminster
Noble, Grace I Hatzic
Roach, William Vancouver
Usiskin, Isidore London, England
Wells, Oswyn A London, England
Zaitzeff, Anatoly Karbin, China
GRADUATES
Facultt op Arts and Science
Abercrombie, Clinton Wm Vancouver
Baird, J. Douglas Vancouver
Ball, Ralph H Kelowna
Ball, Robert Wm Sandwick
Bonsall, Henry B. Vancouver
Campbell, Mildred H Vancouver
Chalmers, William Vancouver
Churchill, Josie C Vancouver List of Students 285
Name. Home Address.
Cross, Harry N Seattle, Wash.
Davidson, Jean E — Vancouver
Elliott, Muriel E Kamloops
Esler, Mary R. Vancouver
Farrand, Charles J. S Vancouver
Gallaugher, Arthur F Vancouver
Gordon, Margaret Vancouver
Griffith, Graham G. Vancouver
Griffith, Mary E Sardis
Hopkins, Jean F. C Stockton, Man.
Hose, Reginald E Victoria
Kask, Marie K. Vancouver
Kidd, Honor M. Vancouver
Mawdsley, M. Dorothy Vancouver
Mellish, A. Preston Vancouver
Macdonald, Alexander B Vancouver
Northrop, Harold Vancouver
Paterson, Philip G Vancouver
Phemister, Mary W Vancouver
Portsmouth, Madge Mission City
Rae, Hugh McC Vancouver
Rankin, Agnes H Vancouver
Reith, Helen W. Penticton
Sangster, Norman Vancouver
Sharpe, Vera M Enderby
Smith, Louis F Vancouver
Sparks, Frederick P Vancouver
Telford, Gordon D Vancouver
Thompson, Homer A Rosedale
Tipping, Wessie M. M Vancouver
Tonks, J. Charles Enderby
Webster, Arnold A Vancouver
Weld, John N Vancouver
Woodrow, Jean Vancouver
Facultt of Applied Science
Jones, William Alfred Vancouver
Facultt of Agriculture
Caple, Kenneth Percy Vancouver
Middlemass, James Douglas Edinburgh, Scotland
Tarr, Hugh Lewis Aubrey North Vancouver
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Arkwright, Dorothy Vancouver
Armstrong, Helen Jessie Penticton
Barton, Carl Francis Vancouver
Barton, Isobel Wilson Vancouver
Beane, May Elizabeth Victoria 286 The University of British Columbia
Name. Home Address.
Bolt, Sybil Vancouver
Byrne, Thomas Scully Vancouver
Catterall, John Leslie Vancouver
Chamberlain, Edward Robert Vancouver
Clark, Kathleen Lilian Vancouver
Conrad, Elsie Vancouver
Crich, Evelyn Pethalda Vancouver
Dobie, Margaret Helen New Westminster
Doidge, Gilbert North Vancouver
Fowler, Horace Wesley Vancouver
Fuller, Betty Sarah Campbell Victoria
Gadd, Gwendolyn Mavis Vancouver
Gauthier, Alexander Cairns Vancouver
Gilley, Hazel Letitia New Westminster
Grace, John New Westminster
Greggor, Clara Fenella Vancouver
Groves, Dorothy Vancouver
Handford, Cecile Margaret Vancouver
Hill, Mark Russell Vancouver
Hopkins, Jean Frances Christina Stockton, Manitoba
Jenks, Edwin Leslie Cardiff, Wales
Johns, Alfred Edward Tacoma, Wash.
Kievell, Myrtle Lorraine Vancouver
Langridge, Gertrude Annie Vancouver
Ledingham, George Menzies Vancouver
Leeming, Marjorie Hope Victoria
Levirs, Franklin Oliver Parker Victoria
Logie, William James Vancouver
Lynn, Mildred Brown Vancouver
Marsh, D'Arcy Gilbert Vancouver
Matheson, Laughlin Alexander Caron, Sask.
Menten, Marjorie Evelyn New Westminster
Meredith, Jean Odette Foulis North Vancouver
Minaty, William Vancouver
Myers, Alice Elizabeth MacDougall Naramata
Macdonald, A. Bruce Vancouver
MacDonald, Kenna Cecilia Vernon
McGregor, Mary Catherine Vancouver
Mclntyre, Charles Mearns Vancouver
MacKinnon, Marion Catherine Cranbrook
Osborne, Donald James Fitz Vancouver
Norman, Ralph Overton Vancouver
Palmer, Peter Fourie Vancouver
Pollock, James Robert Vancouver
Potter, Frank Cumberland
Raby, Ila Gertrude Salmon Arm
Reid, Mary Fraser Vancouver
Spargo, Thomas Vancouver
Story, Jean Margaret Vancouver
Straight, Winona Thereza Vancouver
Sutherland, John Houston Vancouver
Swannell, Charles Frederick Victoria
Swanson, Margaret Vancouver
Swencisky, Grace Helen New Westminster Registration for 1926-27
287
Name. Home Address.
Teeple, Ruth Eleanor Vancouver
Thompson, Bertha Hazel Vancouver
Thomson, Isabelle McMillan Winnipeg
Usher, Katherine Hepburn Vancouver
Vincent, George Gaston Victoria
Wallis, Hubert Douglas Courtenay #
Washington, Dorothy Marion Vancouver
White, Arthur Edwin Vancouver
Registration for 1926-27
Faculty of Arts and Science
Women
First Year 265
Second Year 126
Third Year 98
Fourth Year 81
Partial 16
Faculty of Applied Science
First Year —
Second Year —
Third Year —
Fourth Year —
.Partial —
Nursing
First Year 11
Second Year 5
Third Year 6
Fourth Year 4
Fifth Year 5
Partial 4
Faculty of Agriculture
First Year 2
Second Year —
Third Year —
Fourth Year 1
Partial 1
Graduates
Arts and Science 18
Applied Science —
Agriculture —
Men
Total
274
539
124
250
87
185
72
153
34
50
—1177
77
77
51
51
24
24
37
37
19
19
208
11
.—
5
— ■
6
—
4
.—
5
■
4
35
13
15
10
10
5
5
4
5
13
14
— 49
24
42
1
1
3
3
46 288
The University of British Columbia
Teacher Training Course
Teacher Training Course 37 30 67
Short Courses
Summer Session 438
Agriculture 98
Public Health Nursing 9
Botany 51
67
1582
DEGREES CONFERRED
Mat, 1926
Faculty of Arts and Science
The Degree of Master of Arts
(Name* in alphabetical order)
Carpenter, Gilbert B., B.A.
Davis, N. F. Gordon, B.A.
Gage, Walter H., B.A. ...
Gillanders, Earl B., B.A. .
Greig, Janet T., B.A
Hallamore, Gertrude Joyce, B.A,
Hamilton, George H., B.A.
Mathews, Helen M., B.A. .
Morrison, Louise D., BA..
Nuttall, Thomas H., B.A. .
Palmer, Peter F., B.A. ...
Russell, Isabel M., B.A. ..
Smith, Gertrude M., B.A .
Stevens, Ernest S., B.A. ..
Story, Evelyn S., B.A. ...
Williamson, Lillian A., B.A
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
}.. Major
Minor
... Major
Mnior
... Major
Mnior
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
.. .Major
Minor
... Major
Minor
Chemistry
Mathematics and Physics
Geology
Zoology
Mathematics
Physics
Geology
Zoology and Paleontology
French
English
German
English
Philosophy
Sociology
Bacteriology
Education
French
German
Philosophy
English
English
Economics
French
Education
Zoology
Botany
History
Economics
History
Sociology
English
French Degrees Conferred 289
The Degree of Bachelor of Arts
With Honours
(Names in alphabetical order)
Aitken, James (1st class honours in Economics)
Ball, Ralph Henry (2nd class honours in Chemistry)
Barton, Bernice Eveline (1st class honours in French)
Barton, Lorna Durnford (2nd class honours fn French)
Berkeley, Alfreda Alice ..(1st class honours in Biology —
Zoology option)
Birney, Alfred Earle (1st class honours in English
Language and Literature)
Boyles, Sadie Margaret (1st class honours in French)
Campbell, Mildred Helena ...(1st class honours in Biology —
Zoology option)
Catterall, John Leslie (1st class honours in Classics)
Chalmers, William (1st class honours in Chemistry)
Freeman, Maurice (1st class honours in Economics)
Fuller, Betty (2nd class honours in English and
History)
Gallaugher, Arthur Frederick (2nd class honours in Chemistry)
Gould, Clara Walters Heavysege.. (2nd class honours in French)
Grace, John (2nd class honours in French)
Griffith, Braham Grey (2nd class honours in Biology —
Botany option)
Gruchy, Allan Garfield (1st class honours in Economics)
King, Gladys Agnes (2nd class honours in Economics)
Kobe, Susumu (2nd class honours in Economics)
Langridge, Gertrude Annie (1st class honours, in French)
Leach, Frances Wanetta (1st class honours in French)
Logie, William James (2nd class honours in Chemistry)
Mellish, Arthur Preston (1st class honours in Mathematics)
Mitchell, Marion (1st class honours in History)
Murphy, William (1st class honours In History)
Myers, Alice Elizabeth MacDougall (1st class honours in French)
McCulloch, Walter Fraser (2nd class honours in Biology —
Botany option)
McGregor, Mary Catherine (2nd class honours in French)
Mclntyre, Charles Mearns ........ (2nd class honours in French)
Nakano, Noboru Abe (2nd class honours in Economics)
Price, Anna E (2nd class honours in French)
Stirling, Barbara Grote..., (1st class honours in Biology —
Zoology option)
Story, Jean Margaret (1st class honours in English
Language and Literature)
Sutherland, John Houston (1st class honours in French)
Taylor, David Allan Brown (2nd class honours in English and
History)
Taylor, Thos. Mayne Cuninghame.. (2nd class honours in Biology —
Botany option)
Wales, Bertram Edward (2nd class honours in Mathematics
and Physics) 290
The University of British Columbia
Smith, Louis F.
In Pass Course
(Names in order of merit)
Class I
Smith, Marlon R.
Minaty, William
Graham, Jean A. C.
Gibbard, Charles A.
Potter, Frank
MacKinnon, Ronald L.
McKay, Doris G.
MacKay, Mary A.
Swannell, Charles F.
Bonsall, Henry B.
Bridge, John W.
Leeming, Marjorie H.
HU1, Mark R.
Levirs, Franklin O. P.
Telford, Gordon D.
Macdonald, A. Bruce
Jones, Margaret E.
Verchere, David R.
MacDonald, Kenna C.
Crees, Norman J.
Gauthier, Alexander C.
Mercer, W. E. Arthur
Henderson, Robert A.
Henderson, Anne A.
Cull, J. Simpson
Washington, Dorothy M.
Gartshore, Hendrie
Hodgins, Lillian
Lynn, Mildred B.
Edgett, Freda B.
McLennan, Percy G.
Bolt, Sybil
Garner, Edna B.
Moore, Hilton M.
Handford, Cecile M.
Brown, Florence V.
Bell, William J.
Barton, Isobel W.
Armour, John A. K.
Armstrong, Helen J.
Meredith, Joan 0- F.
Wilkinson, Jane H.
Thompson, Bertha H.
Irwin, M. Lenora
Gilley, Hazel L.
Phipps, Edith Sheila M.
Woodrow, Jean
Class II
Musgrave, Flora M.
Dimock, Marjorie C.
Piters, Jack
Purdy, Harry Leslie
Teeple, Ruth E.
King, Esther E.
Arkwright, Dorothy
Beane, May E.
Hunter, H. Murray
Baines, Alyce A. W.
Clark, Kathleen L.
Dobie, M. Helen
Chamberlain, Edward R.
Marsh, D'Arcy G.
Garesche, Gladys Mary
Farrand, Charles J. S.
Ash worth, George William
Vincent, George G.
Lade, Mary E.
Swanson, Margaret
Byrne, Thomas S.
Palmer, Russell A.
Dlckman, Esther E.
Fowler, Horace W.
'Passed
Bridgman, Clara M.
MacRae, Jean W.
Balmer, Ian
. Usher, Katherine H.
Reid, Mary F.
Lyttleton, Helen M.
Gadd, Gwendoline M.
Baillie, Oenone G.
Stuart, Ronald J.
: Davidson, Allen E.
Swencisky, Grace H.
Cogslan, Basil S.
Menten, Marjorie E.
Eaton, Virginia L.
Baynes, Doris L.
Straight, Winona T.
Gregger, Clara F.
Macdonald, Eileen
Wilcox, Laura
Ledingham, George M.
Fraser, Ruth A.
Raby, Ha Gertrude
Bullock-Webster, Marlon L Degrees Conferred 291
Passed (Unranked)
(Names in alphabetical order)
Auden, Kenneth F. Kidd, Honor M.
Baker, Lorimer G. Lanning, Walter S. W. <
Clarke, Mary Kathleen Marin, Rosa A. M.
Cooper, Ursula H. McKee, Mary M.
Faulkner, Jean C. Poore, Henry J. C.
Double Course Arts and Applied Science
Liersch, John Edward Oliver, John Craig
Millar, James W.
Faculty of Applied Science
The Degree of Master of Applied Science
(Names in alphabetical order)
Carter, Marshall Neal, B.A. Sc Major: Chemistry
Minor: Physics
Jackson, Gerald Christopher Arden, B.A. Sc.Major: Geology
Minor: Biology
Lucas, Colin Cameron, B.A. Sc Major: Chemistry
Minor: Biology
Price, Peter, BA. Sc Major: Geology
Minor: Civil Engineering
The Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science
(Names in order of merit)
Chemical Engineering
Passed (Unranked)
Niederman, Otto Emil
Civil Engineering
Class I
Baylis, Robert Henry
Class II
Louden, Thomas Newton
Electrical Engineering
Class I
Tarr, Francis Gilbert Aubrey
Class II
Robinson, George Richard Buchanan, Thomas Gwynne
Tamura, Moriklyo
Passed (Unranked)
Callander, Maitland Bruco Steede, John Horsford 292 The Uuiversity op British Columbia
Forest Engineering
Class II
Bassett, Edward William Falconer, Joseph G.
Guernsey, Frederick tyilliam Abernethy, Gordon McKellar
Geological Engineering
Class I
Norman, George William Hal
Class II
Kania, Joseph Ernest Anthony Brock, Byron Britton
Jones, William Alfred Pollock, James Robert
Barton, Carl Francis
Mechanical Engineering
Class I
Hale, Frederick Montague
Passed ^^
Wilks, Ernest Fabian Timleck, Curtis^James
Bain, William Alexander
Passed (Unranked)
Letson, Gordon Mcintosh
Mining Engineering
Passed (Unranked)
Hodson, Reginald Groves, Godfrey Francis Charles
Nursing
Class I
Kerr, Margaret E. Innes, Florence A. I.
Armstrong, Norah
Faculty of Agriculture
The Degree of Bachelor of Science in Agriculture
(Names in order of merit)
Class I
Biely, Jacob - McCurrach, John Bruce
Class II
Allen, Maude Andrews Mutrie, Fergus
Tarr, Hugh Lewis Aubrey Rive, Charles
Gough, William Frederick
Passed (Unranked)
Caple, Kenneth Percy Thompson, David William
September, 1926
Faculty of Arts and Science
The Degree of Bachelor of Arts
Warren, Harry Verney Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 293
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, AND PRIZES
Awarded Mat, 1926
Faculty of Arts and Science
Fourth Tear
1. The Governor-General's Gold Medal William Chalmers
(Head of Graduating Class in Arts.)
2. The Historical Society Gold Medal Marion Mitchell
(History.)
Third Year
1. University Scholarship, |75.00 Harold D. Smith
(General Proficiency.)
2. University Scholarship, $75.00 H R. Lyle Streight
(General Proficiency.)
3. The Arts '19 Scholarship, $150.00 David C. Warden
(Standing and Character.)
4. The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize, Books, $50.00 No award
(Essays in Economics or Political Science.)
Second Year
1. The McGill Graduates' Scholarship, $137.50 George F. Davidson
(First in English and French.)
2. University Scholarship, $75.00 George F. Davidson, by
(General Proficiency.) reversion to Eleanor G. Dyer
3. University Scholarship, $75.00 Eleanor G. Dyer and
Earland C. Hallonquist, by reversion to F. Abner Poole
4. Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship, $110.00 Annie Taylor
5. The Scott Memorial Scholarship, $110.00 Verna Z. Lucas
(First in Biology.)
6. The Shaw Memorial Scholarship, $137.50.. .George F. Davidson, by
reversion to Earland G. Hallonquist
(First in English, Latin and Greek.)
First Year
1. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 Howard G. Nicholson
(General Proficiency.)
2. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 Joshua J. M. Jacob
(General Proficiency.)
3. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 H. Muriel Daniels
(General Proficiency.)
4. The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize, $25.00—
Equal, Alan James Macdonald, David William Macdonald
(First in Mathematics.)
5. P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship, $75.00 Alice M. G. White
(First in English.)
Faculty of Applied Science
For Post Graduate Studies
The Dean Brock Scholarship, $100.00 .George W. H Norman
Fourth Year
1. The Convocation Scholarship, $50.00 '. .Robert H. Baylis
(General Proficiency.) 294 The University op British Columbia
2. The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize, Book, $25. .Francis G. A. Tarr
(Engineering Thesis.)
Third Year
The Dunsmuir Scholarship, $165.00 Jack D. Shannon
(Highest in Mining Engineering.)
Second Year
University Scholarship, $75.00 James Sinclair
(General Proficiency.)
First Year
Roya.1 Institution Scholarship, $75.00 Alois H. Rudnicki
(General Proficiency.)
Nursing
Fourth Year f^^k'
Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship.. .Frances Emily Lyne
Public Health Nursing
.Provincial Board of Health Prize, $36.00 Margaret E. Kerr
Provincial Board of Health Prize, $34.00 Florence Innes
Provincial Board of Health Prize, $30.00 Louisa Drysdale
Faculty of Agriculture
For Post Graduate Studies
W. C. Macdonald Scholarship, $500.00 Charles T. Townsend
Third Year
The B. C. Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship, $100.00—
(Horticulture.) Lester D. Mallory
First Year
University Scholarship, $75.00 Lindsay M. Black
(General Proficiency.)
General—(Open)
For Post Graduate Studies
1. University Scholarship, $200.00 William Chalmers
(Special Aptitude.)
2. The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship, $100.00 Sadie M. Boyles
3. University Book Prize, $25.00 A. Earle Birney
(Literary—Essay.)
4. The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship, $110.00—
(Canadian History.) Gwendolen M. Musgrave
5. The Historical Society Prize, $25.00 Gwendolen M. Musgrave
(Essay on an assigned subject.)
6. The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship, $250.00—
(Returned Soldier.) George W. Waddlngton
L_ Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 295
7. The Players' Club Prize, $50.00 . .No award
(Original Play.)
8. University Scholarship for Returned Soldiers, $75.00—
Thomas B. Lott
9. University Scholarship for Returned Soldiers, $75.00—
William H. Christie
10. The Letters Club Prize, $25.00 No award
11. The Nichol Scholarship Dorothy Dallas
The Nichol Scholarship (Continuing) Jack Huggett
12. The Native Sons of Canada Scholarship (Thesis in Canadian
History.) First Prize, $350.00 Marion Mitchell
Second Prize, $150.00 Fnanklin Levirs THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
UNIVERSITY SUMMER SESSION, 1927
Six Weeks—July 4th to August 13th
The University Summer Session began in 1920 as a Summer School for teachers. Its original purpose was to provide
instruction in the subjects of the First Year of the University
course for teachers in service who desired to qualify for First
Class certificates. In 1921 the name was changed and work
was enlarged to include a number of Second Year subjects and
provision was made whereby those attending might complete
the work of the first two years. Since 1921 a number of Summer Session students have succeeded in obtaining the thirty
units of credit prescribed for the First and Second Years and
a definite demand for more advanced courses has arisen.
In addition to the regular academic courses the Summer
Session has conducted classes in Commercial Subjects designed
to assist candidates for the Commercial Certificate. It has also
given special courses designed to acquaint teachers with the
newer aspects of educational practice, such as mental measurements, vocational guidance and the psychology of special subjects of the elementary and high school curriculum. These
special courses will be continued in the Summer Session of 1927.
The Summer Session Announcement, giving details of
courses and particulars as to fees, etc., is issued early in the
spring of each year and may be obtained free by application
to the Registrar. Bequests for special information should be
addressed to The Director of the Summer Session, The University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C. 298 The University op British Columbia
STUDENT ORGANIZATION
In order that the activities of the student body may be
effectively carried on, the Alma Mater Society has been organized, with a governing executive called the Students' Council. It
is the duty of the Students' Council to control all the activities
of the societies subsidiary to the Alma Mater Society.
Each student on admittance to the University automatically
becomes a member of the Alma Mater Society. All student
activities are regulated and questions of student discipline are
controlled by the Students' Council. It consists of ten
members, chosen from the Third and Fourth Years. With the
exception of the Editor-in-chief of the "Ubyssey," the members
are elected by ballot at the close of the session preceding their
term of office.
In order that the work may be carried on to the best advantage, considerable funds are necessary, and the Alma Mater fee
of $7.00, compulsory for all students, is designed to cover the
expenses incurred.
Students upon entering the University have an opportunity
to take part in practically all lines of sport, as well as to participate in debating and public speaking, and various other
activities which are more clearly indicated below.
Publications Board
The Publications Board is best known from the Handbook,
the "Ubyssey" and the "Annual." In the first of these an
attempt is made to compile information valuable to the undergraduate. The "Ubyssey," the College paper, is published
twice a week. The members of the Staff are Students selected
as a result of voluntary competition. The "Annual," which
is published at the end of the spring term, summarizes the
activities of the various classes and societies.
Literary and Scientific Department
The Literary and Scientific Department co-ordinates the
workings of its constituent Societies, which are indicated below.
In the Players' Club, those whose talents lie in the direction
of the drama may find medium of expression. Student Organization 299
The Musical Society, membership in which is granted as a
result of competitive try-outs, consists of an orchestra and mixed
chorus comprising over a hundred students under professional
leadership.
For those interested in public speaking and debating there
are the Men's Literary Society, the Women's Literary Society
and the Agriculture Discussion Club.
The Chemistry Society, the Engineering Discussion Club,
the Social Science Club, the Live-stock Club and the G. M.
Dawson Discussion Club offer a field for discussion of Scientific
and Social problems. ^^
Women's Athletics
The Women's Athletic Association comprises all the
women's athletic clubs of the University, the chief of which are
herewith briefly described:
The Women's Basketball Club enters two teams in the
City League.
The Women's Swimming Club competes with the V.A.S.C.,
and also against Victoria during the annual trip. This year a
course in life-saving has been given.
The women may join the Badminton and Tennis clubs,
which are under the Men's Athletic Association.
The Grass Hockey Club, though not entered in a league,
plays challenge games against the High Schools, New Westminster and Victoria.
The Women's Gymnasium Club meets once a week, under
a physical instructor.
The Track Club holds, with the Men's Track Club, a joint
meet which takes place annually at Brockton Point, one of the
women's events being the relay for the Arts '25 Cup.
A Training Club for all women playing on any University
team. This club meets twice a week, under the supervision of
the University trainer.
Inter-class matches are arranged in basketball, badminton,
swimming, track, etc., for which points are awarded, the winning 300 The University of British Columbia
class being the holders of the Chris. Spencer Cup for the ensuing
year.
Men's Athletics
The Men's Athletic Association endeavors to foster all
branches of clean and manly sport.
The Rugby season opens at the beginning of the Fall Term.
Practices are held once a week, and teams are entered by the
Rugby Club as follows: Two teams play in the Miller Cup
League for the city championship, and from these a First Team
is chosen to play in the McKechnie Cup League for the provincial championship. The Second and Freshmen teams, the
latter comprised entirely of Freshmen, play in the Intermediate
League of the city for the Province Cup.
Basketball season follows that of Rugby. Four teams, two
senior and two intermediate, are chosen and entered in the
City League.
The Soccer Club enters three teams in the City leagues.
The first team plays in the Pacific Coast League and in the
provincial championship series. The second team plays in the
Second Division, while the third team is entered in the Junior
League. t ™
The Track Club takes charge of all field events, its big
features being the Western Canada Inter-collegiate Amateur
Athletic Union track meet, the Arts '20 relay race, and the
annual inter-class track meet.
The Men's Grass Hockey Club, recently formed, enters a
team in the City League.
The Rowing Club is affiliated with the Vancouver Rowing
Club, and retains its identity as a University Club.
The Ice Hockey Club enters a team each year in the city
series.
The Outdoors Club takes charge of all picnics, hikes, mountain climbing, excursions, and outdoor parties.
The Tennis Tournament takes place after the opening of
the Fall Term, and the championship games are played in men's
and women's singles and doubles, and also mixed doubles. Student Organization 301
The Badminton Club holds practices and games in the evenings throughout the winter.
The Boxing and the Swimming Clubs meet once a week
during the winter, under capable instructors.
Alumni Association
This organization was formed in May, 1917. It is composed of Honorary, Active, and Associate members. Honorary
membership includes all members of the Faculty. Active membership includes all Associate members who have paid their
annual fee of $2.00 for town members, $1.00 for out-of-town
members. All graduates of the University automatically become
Associate members on graduating.
The purpose of the Association is to further the interests of
the University and the Alumni. To accomplish this purpose
the Association aims to keep its members interested in the University and the Alma Mater, so that they may know their college
not only as it was, but as it is, and can be. To carry out these
aims general meetings are held every two months during the
University term. In addition, a directory of our graduates is
sent to all Active members, while news bulletins are sent to both
Active and Associate members.
There are four standing committees in the Association,
which seek to foster interest in athletics, music, dramatics and
publications among members of the Association, and throughout
the Province in other organizations. VICTORIA COLLEGE
(IN AFFILIATION WITH THE UNIVERSITY OF B.C.)
STAFF
Edward B. Pawl, M.A. LL.D. (Aberdeen), Principal, Associate Professor
of Classics.
H. H. Smith, B.A. (Toronto), Registrar, Demonstrator in Physical and
Chemical Laboratories.
Pntcr H. Elliott, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor of Science.
Miss Jeanette A. Caxw, B.L. (Dalhousie), Assistant Professor of English
and Philosophy.
Mme. E. Sandemon-Monoin, Assistant Professor of French.
B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cambridge), Assistant Professor of Mathematics.
E. S. Fabb, B.A., LL.B. (Toronto), Instructor in History and Economics.
J. A. Cunningham, B.A. (Queen's), Instructor in Biology.
The College at Victoria, B. C, gives instruction in the first
two years of the course in Arts and Science. The courses
offered are:
First and Second Years
The work of the first two years consists of 30 units, 15 of
which must be taken in each year.
Each student must take:—
Unite
(a) English 1 in the First Year and English 2 in the
Second Year. 6
(5) The first two courses in a language offered for
Matriculation, one course in each year 6
(c) Mathematics 1 in the First Year 3
(d) History 1 or 2 or 3, or Philosophy 1 or Economics 1 (if possible) 3
(e) Biology 1, Chemistry 1 or Physics 1 3
(/) Three courses—not already chosen—selected from
the following:—
Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Economics 1, French
1, French 2, Greek 1, Greek 2, History 1,
History 2, Latin 1, Latin 2, Mathematics 2,
Mathematics 3, Philosophy 1, Physics 1 9
The rules and regulations governing the College are the
same as those in force in the University. WESTMINSTER HALL
(United Church of Canada)
VANCOUVER, B. C.
(In affiliation with The University of British Columbia)
Principal
Rev. W. H. Smith, M.A., Ph.D., D.D.
Westminster Hall offers courses in Theology, and, under the
general regulations of the University in reference to affiliated
Theological Colleges, provides classes for which credit is given
in the Arts Course for the B.A. degree. 4
For - Library Home /
- Search Collections /
- Open Collections /
- Browse Collections /
- UBC Publications /
- The University of British Columbia Calendar
Open Collections
UBC Publications
Featured Collection
UBC Publications
The University of British Columbia Calendar Aug 30, 1927
jpg
Page Metadata
Item Metadata
| Title | The University of British Columbia Calendar |
| Publisher | Vancouver : [University of British Columbia] |
| Date Issued | 1927 |
| Subject |
University of British Columbia |
| Geographic Location | Vancouver (B.C.) |
| Genre |
Periodicals |
| Type |
Text |
| FileFormat | application/pdf |
| Language | English |
| Notes | Titles in chronological order: Annual Calendar of the McGill University College of British Columbia (1909 - 1914) ; Calendar of the University of British Columbia (1915 - 1919) ; Calendar University of British Columbia (1920 - 1922) ; The University of British Columbia Calendar (1923 - 1964) ; UBC Calendar (1963 - 1968) ; The University of British Columbia 69/70 Fifty-Fifth Session ; The University of British Columbia 70/71 Fifty-Sixth Session ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Seventh Session Calendar 1971/72 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Eighth Session Calendar 1972/73 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Ninth Session Calendar 1973-4 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada Sixtieth Session Calendar 1974/5 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver/Canada Sixty-First Session Calendar 1975-76 ; 1976-1977 The University of British Columbia Sixty-Second Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1977/78 Sixty-Third Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 64th Session 1978/1979 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 65th Session 1979/1980 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1980-1981 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1981-82 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 68th Session 1982-83 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 69th Session 1983-84 Calendar ; UBC 1984/85 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 71st Session 1985-86 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 72nd Session 1986-87 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 73rd Session 1987-88 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 74th Session 1988-89 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 75th Session 1989-90 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 76th Session 1990-91 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 77th Session 1991-92 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 78th Session 1992-93 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 79th Session 1993-94 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1994/95 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1995/96 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1997/98 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1998/99 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1999/2000 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 2000/2001 Calendar ; 2001/2002 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2003/04 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2004/2005 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2005/2006 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2006/07 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2007/08 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2008/09. |
| Identifier | LE3 .B8 LE3_B8_1927-28 |
| Collection |
University Publications |
| Source | Original Format: University of British Columbia. Archives |
| Date Available | 2016-06-22 |
| Provider | Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library |
| Rights | Images provided for research and reference use only. Permission to publish, copy, or otherwise use these images must be obtained from The University of British Columbia Enrolment Services: direct inquiries to www.students.ubc.ca/calendar |
| CatalogueRecord | http://resolve.library.ubc.ca/cgi-bin/catsearch?bid=1209095 |
| DOI | 10.14288/1.0169756 |
| AggregatedSourceRepository | CONTENTdm |
Download
- Media
- calendars-1.0169756.pdf
- Metadata
- JSON: calendars-1.0169756.json
- JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169756-ld.json
- RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169756-rdf.xml
- RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169756-rdf.json
- Turtle: calendars-1.0169756-turtle.txt
- N-Triples: calendars-1.0169756-rdf-ntriples.txt
- Original Record: calendars-1.0169756-source.json
- Full Text
- calendars-1.0169756-fulltext.txt
- Citation
- calendars-1.0169756.ris